JP2022145883A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of increasing a player's degree of attention to a game by expanding the player's options.

SOLUTION: A game machine includes a rotary generator 53E permitting entry of game balls flowing down a game area on the basis of a result of an internal lottery executed based on entry of game balls into start ball entry means. The rotary generator 53E includes: a round game execute game for permitting entry of game balls entering the rotary generator 53E and controlling a game in a specific control state on the basis of entry of game balls; and a replay gate that permits entry of game balls entering the rotary generator 53E and does not control a game in a specific game state on the basis of entry of game balls.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 71

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The gaming machine shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, for example, when winning a jackpot lottery. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

JP 2005-074175 A

However, after shifting the game state to the specific control state, the gaming machine follows the same flow to start the game in the specific control state regardless of whether or not the action of the player is intervened. There is a problem that the series of flow from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is lowered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the player's options and increasing the player's attention to the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention includes a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, and an internal lottery is performed when a game ball enters. and a game state transition for shifting the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A gaming machine comprising a variable entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down a game area to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. a specific ball entry unit for allowing a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to enter the game ball, and controlling a game in a specific control state based on the entry of the game ball; It is characterized by comprising a non-specific ball entry part that allows entry of a game ball that has entered the means and that does not control a game in a specific control state based on the entry of the game ball.

According to the present invention, the player's options can be expanded, and the player's attention to the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; front view of game board Enlarged view of the vicinity of the right variable ball entry mechanism A diagram showing the movement of the game ball in the ejection route and the clone route An enlarged view of the vicinity of the Kroon seen from above A view of the non-electric accessory seen from the back side of the game board Enlarged view of the vicinity of the non-motorized accessories Enlarged view of the vicinity of the non-motorized accessories Side view of non-motorized accessories Figure showing the display screen of the pattern display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Diagram showing the contents of each counter used for internal lottery A diagram showing a success/failure table that stores values of random numbers for winning a jackpot A diagram showing a distribution table storing random number values related to distribution destinations of jackpot types Figure showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing A diagram showing a flowchart of winning processing for the round game execution gate A diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening Diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing Diagram showing a flowchart of main processing A diagram showing a flowchart of game round control processing Diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing Diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation start processing Diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the round number setting process A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process A diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device and the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process performed with a sound emission control apparatus. A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the determination processing of the number of rounds. A diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right variable entry mechanism when switching to the opening and closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory is not opened. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right variable ball entry mechanism when the opening and closing execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory is opened. The front view of the game board according to the second embodiment of the present invention The disassembled perspective view which expanded the vicinity of the croon and was seen from the diagonal upper side Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right variable entry mechanism when switching to the opening and closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory is not opened. A perspective view showing a flow in which a game ball is guided to a discharge passage after a ball enters the 4th round execution gate. A perspective view showing a flow in which a game ball is guided to a connecting passage after a ball enters a 4-round execution gate. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right variable entry mechanism when switching to the opening and closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory is not opened. A perspective view showing a flow in which a game ball is guided to a discharge passage after a ball is entered into a 16-round execution gate. A perspective view showing a flow in which a game ball is guided to a connecting passage after a ball enters a 16-round execution gate. Front view of a game board according to a third embodiment of the present invention The disassembled perspective view which expanded the vicinity of the croon and was seen from the diagonal upper side A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right variable entry mechanism when switching to the opening and closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory is not opened. Top view of the croon when the ball enters the 4th round execution gate A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right variable entry mechanism when switching to the opening and closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory is not opened. Top view of the croon when a ball enters the 16 round execution gate Front view of a game board according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention An enlarged view of the vicinity of the Kroon seen from above Front view of a game board according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention A diagram showing the internal structure of a non-electric accessory A diagram showing the internal structure of a non-motorized accessory when a ball enters the 16-round execution gate A diagram showing the internal structure of a non-electric accessory when a ball is entered into the non-electric accessory A diagram showing the internal structure of the non-electric role after the ball is entered into the non-electric role The figure which expanded the croon which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention, and was seen from the upward side Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device and the display control device A diagram showing a flowchart of winning processing for the round game execution gate A diagram showing a flowchart of the round number setting process The figure which shows the flowchart of the setting processing for round game execution gates A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing a flowchart of round game execution gate determination processing A diagram showing an example of the determination processing of the execution gate confirmation effect and the execution gate confirmation effect A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right variable entry mechanism when switching to the opening and closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory is not opened. A diagram showing another example of the determination processing of the execution gate confirmation effect and the execution gate confirmation effect A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right variable entry mechanism when switching to the opening and closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory is not opened. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right variable ball entry mechanism when the opening and closing execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory is opened. The figure which shows the flowchart of the setting processing for round game execution gates which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. A diagram showing a flowchart of round game execution gate determination processing A diagram showing an example of the determination processing of the execution gate confirmation effect and the execution gate confirmation effect A diagram showing a flowchart of prize winning processing for the round game execution gate according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention A diagram showing a flowchart of the round number setting process A diagram showing a flowchart of round game execution gate determination processing Diagram showing gate resetting effect A diagram showing an example of determination processing of the execution gate confirmation effect and execution gate confirmation effect after executing the gate resetting effect. Front view of a game board according to a modification of the present invention Enlarged view of the vicinity of the right variable ball entry mechanism A diagram showing a timing chart of opening and closing of the blade member, the valve main body, and the plate when shifting to the opening and closing execution mode.

[First embodiment]
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko game machine which is a kind of game machine. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main body attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward (front side). 12.

The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown) supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side, and an inner frame (not shown) disposed in front of the inner frame. A front door frame 13 supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side, and a front door frame 13 disposed behind the inner frame and rearward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side. and a back pack unit (not shown) supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable.

The gaming machine main body 12 has a locking device (not shown) provided at the leading end of the rotation. This locking device has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and has a function of locking the front door frame 13 with respect to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. have. These locked states are released by unlocking the cylinder lock 14 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

The front door frame 13 has a substantially elliptical window portion 21 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted in the window portion 21 . In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but may be made of synthetic resin or the like to be transparent and colorless.
In addition, the front door frame 13 includes a display lamp portion 23 provided above the window portion 21 as a part of light emitting means configured by various lamp portions and the like provided around the window portion 21, and a display lamp portion A speaker unit 24 is provided on both the left and right sides of 23 and outputs sound effects according to the game situation, and an upper bulging portion 25 and a lower bulging portion 26 provided below the window portion 21. there is

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are vertically arranged side by side and both are provided to bulge forward.
The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25a provided inside so as to open upward. The upper tray 25a temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the payout device 71 (see FIG. 11) provided in the back pack unit, and while aligning them in a line, moves them toward the game ball launching mechanism 81 (see FIG. 11). It has the function of guiding.
The lower bulging portion 26 also has a lower plate 26a provided inside so as to open upward. The lower tray 26a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 25a.

Further, the front door frame 13 has a firing handle 27 as a firing means provided on the right side of the lower tray 26a. The shooting handle 27 is operated by a player of the pachinko machine 10 to shoot a game ball from a game ball shooting mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward a game area provided above the inner frame. do. The shooting handle 27 changes the shooting intensity of the game ball shot toward the game area, ie, the momentum of shooting, by changing the amount of rotation operation.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 31 has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to its surface, and is mounted on an inner frame. The game area described above is formed on the game board 31 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 . Almost the entire area of this game area can be visually recognized from the front through the window portion 21 .
The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide rail 34 for the game ball to the game area, and the guide rail 34 is launched from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 when the player rotates the shooting handle 27. The game ball that has been hit is guided to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 34 is formed so that its exit portion is arranged on one side of the game area and faces the center of the upper part of the game area. For this reason, the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is shifted from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side as the rotation amount of the shooting handle 27 by the player increases. Shift to the side of the side. In this embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the game area.

The game board 31 has, in the game area, a plurality of large and small openings which are formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In addition, the game board 31 includes a general winning port 35 provided at each opening, an upper operating port (first starting ball entering portion) 36, a lower operating port (second starting ball entering portion) 37, a variable winning device 38, It has an out port 39 and a non-electric accessory 51 . This non-electric accessory 51 is provided on the lower right side of the general prize winning opening 35 . The game board 31 also has an opening 311 provided on the lower right side of the lower operating port 37 and an opening 312 provided below the non-electric accessory 51 . The game board 31 includes through gates 41 provided on the left and right sides of the central portion, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 43 provided on the central portion, and the like. have. Furthermore, the game board 31 has a large number of nails 44 planted to appropriately disperse or adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills in the game area. ing.

Each of the general winning opening 35, the upper operating opening 36, the lower operating opening 37, and the various winning openings of the variable winning device 38 is provided with detection sensors 40a to 40d (see FIG. 11) for detecting the entry of game balls. The detection sensors 40a to 40d are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. Specifically, the general winning opening 35 has a detection sensor 40a, the upper working opening 36 has a detecting sensor 40b, the lower working opening 37 has a detecting sensor 40c, and the variable winning device 38 has a detecting sensor 40d. It has The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40d. The detection sensors 40a to 40d may be of any kind as long as they can individually detect winning of game balls, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor can be employed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 35 . The pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when a ball enters the upper operating port 36 and when a ball enters the lower operating port 37. - 特許庁The pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball enters the variable prize winning device 38.例文帳に追加In addition, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in each of the operation ports 36 and 37 may be different.

Out port 39 is provided at the bottom of the game area of game board 31 . Game balls that do not enter various winning holes are discharged from the game area through the out hole 39.例文帳に追加In addition, the out port 39 is provided with a detection sensor 40e (see FIG. 11) for detecting an entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters the out hole 39, unlike when a ball enters the various winning holes.

The non-electric accessory 51 is provided on the lower left side of the game area of the game board 31 . In addition, the non-electric accessory 51 includes a detection sensor 40f (see FIG. 11) for detecting the entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters the non-electric accessory 51, unlike when a ball enters the various winning holes. This non-electric accessory 51 will be described later in detail.
It should be noted that the player hits to the left with a medium amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit part of the game area is formed. By shifting to the upper left, the game ball can be guided to the upper operating port 36, the non-electric accessory 51, etc. (left-handed route).

Each through gate 41 is provided with a detection sensor 40g (see FIG. 11) for detecting an entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters each through gate 41, unlike the case where a ball enters a prize winning opening.

Here, the entry ball means that a game ball passes through a predetermined opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow down. However, in the following description, in order to distinguish clearly from the entry of game balls into the out port 39, entry of game balls into various winning ports is also expressed as winning. Further, entering the through gate 41 refers to continuing to flow down the game area without being ejected from the game area after passing through the gate provided in the game area. A ball entering the through gate 41 is also referred to as winning a prize, like entering a ball into various winning holes.

The upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37 are unitized as an operation port device and installed on the game board 31 . Each operating port 36, 37 is opened upward to allow the game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and the upper operating port 36 is arranged upward and the lower operating port 37 is arranged downward. are arranged vertically side by side. The lower operating port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 37a is connected to an electric accessory driving section 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. The electric accessory 37a is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the electric accessory drive section 37b. The closed state is a state in which the lower operation opening 37 is closed by bringing the upper end of the electric accessory 37a closer to the left and right. The open state is a state in which the lower operation opening 37 is opened by separating the upper end of the electric accessory 37a in the left-right direction.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface of the upper operation port 36 becomes narrower than one game ball. Also, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface of the upper operation opening 36 becomes wider than one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot enter the lower operation opening 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, and can enter the lower operation opening 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. can.

In addition, instead of the closed state and the open state described above, the electric accessory 37a has a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the lower operation port 37 (a state in which the game ball can be entered unlike the closed state), and a lower It may be configured to switch between the operation port 37 and the state in which the game ball is likely to win. In addition, the lower operation port 37 may be configured to perform such switching not by setting the electric accessory 37a but by displacing the lower operation port 37. 37 may not include the electric accessory 37a.

The variable winning device 38 drives a large winning opening 38a that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an open/close door 38b for opening and closing the large winning opening 38a, and an opening/closing door 38b. A variable winning drive unit 38c is provided.
The player hits to the right by maximizing the rotation amount of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be guided to the variable winning device 38 avoiding the variable display unit 43 (right-handed route).

Here, the game board 31 has a cover 381 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 38 . The cover 381 consists of a transparent (or translucent) panel 381a formed to make the variable winning device 38 visible from the front side, and an opaque panel 381a provided around the transparent panel 381a. and a panel 381b.
Therefore, the player can see the variable winning device 38 from the front through the transparent panel 381a and the window 21. FIG.

The big winning opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. As described above, the big winning opening 38a is equipped with a detection sensor 40d for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening/closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the big winning opening 38a. The opening/closing door 38b advances toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31 to close the opening of the big winning opening 38a. 31, and an open state in which the opening of the big winning opening 38a is opened.
The variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to either an open state or a closed state by driving the opening/closing door 38b.

Specifically, the opening/closing door 38b is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot win. When the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize.
The opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state and a game ball can be entered into the big winning opening 38a. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode, after the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, it is called one round game until it is set to the closed state again.
Thus, the variable winning device 38 has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter. It functions as opening/closing ball entry means for putting out game balls.

The main display device 42 has a main display unit 45 and a character object display unit 46, and includes a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, a dot display device, and other display devices. arranged and configured.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to protrude toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22 . Also, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than one game ball. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 prevents game balls from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents game balls from falling in front of the main display device 42 .

The main display portion 45 includes a first result display portion 45a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the upper working port 36, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the lower working port 37. A second result display section 45b for displaying the result of the lottery is provided (see FIG. 11). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode when the opening/closing execution mode is entered (or when the opening/closing execution mode is entered). .

The first result display unit 45a executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of the upper working port 36 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working port 36. to display the results of When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display section 45a displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of the lower working opening 37 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working opening 37. to display the results of When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the second result display section 45b displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37 function as starting ball entry means for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter and executing an internal lottery when a game ball enters.

The character object display unit 46 performs variable display of the pattern with the winning of each through gate 41 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41. to display the results of The accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result when the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the electric role open state. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric role open state. In this electric operation open state, the electric accessory 37a provided in the lower operation opening 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and character object display unit 46 are configured by segment displays, but are not limited to this, and may be liquid crystal display devices, organic EL display devices, CRTs, It may also consist of other types of display devices such as dot matrix. The patterns to be variably displayed on the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 include a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters, a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters. , or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted.

The variable display unit 43 includes a pattern display device 47 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a pattern, which is one type of pattern. Also, the variable display unit 43 has a center frame 48 arranged so as to surround the pattern display device 47 . The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the falling of the game balls. It is configured.

The pattern display device 47 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display. The symbol display device 47 starts the variable display of symbols based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 . That is, when the symbol display device 47 performs the variable display in the first result display section 45a of the main display section 45 and when the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45 performs the variable display, The variable display is executed accordingly.
The pattern display device 47 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or other display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 48 includes four first holding lamp portions 49a provided in the area above the pattern display device 47, and four second holding lamp portions 49b provided in the area on the right side of the first holding lamp portion 49a. , and four third holding lamp portions 49c provided in the upper region of the first holding lamp portion 49a.

The first reservation lamp part 49a is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36, and is lit according to the number of reserved balls. The first holding lamp portion 49a can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display portion 45a and the symbol display device 47. FIG.
The second reservation lamp part 49b is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the lower operation opening 37, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The second holding lamp portion 49b can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display portion 45b and the symbol display device 47. FIG.
The third reservation lamp portion 49c is a portion that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won each through gate 41, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The third holding lamp portion 49 c can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display portion 46 .
Note that each of the holding lamp portions 49a to 49c may have other configurations such as being displayed as an image on a portion of the pattern display device 47, which will be described later.

In addition, the center frame 48 includes a right variable ball entry mechanism 52 provided in the lower right area of the pattern display device 47 and a crown 53 provided in the left area of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. there is
The right variable ball entry mechanism 52 causes the game ball flowing down the game area to enter the inside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and then discharges it to the crew root that guides it to the crew 53 and the outside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. It has a function of guiding the game ball entered inside the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the crew route or the ejection route by switching the discharge route.
In addition, the player hits to the right by maximizing the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 27, and changes the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be guided to the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like (right-handed route).

FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the right variable ball entry mechanism.
The right variable ball entry mechanism 52, as shown in FIG. A guide passage 522 for guiding game balls guided to the entrance of 52, a switching portion 523 for switching the destination of the game balls guided by the guide passage 522, a discharge port 524 provided at the guide destination of the guide passage 522, and and a guide rail 525 (see FIG. 4).

The introduction part 521 includes a blade member 521a provided on the game board 31 so as to close the entrance formed on the right side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and a blade member centered on an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. It has a pin 521b that rotatably supports the blade 521a and a blade member driving section 521c that drives the blade member 521a.

The blade member 521a rotates counterclockwise around the pin 521b, thereby switching between a closed state (one-dot chain line in the figure) in which the inlet of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is closed, and a clockwise rotation around the pin 521b. By moving, it has an open state (solid line in the figure) in which the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is opened (see the arrow in the figure). The blade member 521a is inclined so as to descend toward the entrance side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the open state.
The blade member driving section 521c sets the blade member 521a to either a closed state or an open state by driving the blade member 521a.

Here, the blade member 521a is repeatedly set to the closed state and the open state at a predetermined cycle. In other words, the blade member 521a intermittently opens and closes at a predetermined cycle.
In this embodiment, the blade member 521a is repeatedly set to the closed state for 1.5 sec and the open state for 0.5 sec. Therefore, the blade member 521a intermittently opens and closes at a cycle of 2 sec.
In addition, the introduction part 521 may be configured so that the game ball flowing down the game area can enter the inside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and the opening and closing timing of the blade member 521a and the opening and closing of the blade member 521a. The cycle can be set arbitrarily.

Therefore, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving unit 521c, the game ball passes through the blade member 521a using the inclination of the blade member 521a and enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. (solid line in the figure).
On the other hand, when the blade member driving section 521c sets the blade member 521a to the closed state, the game ball does not enter the right variable ball entering mechanism 52 (one-dot chain line in the figure).

The guide passage 522 is formed to have a width that does not allow a plurality of game balls to pass through the passage at the same time. In addition, the guide passage 522 branches into two on the way, and has an upstream guide passage 522a positioned upstream of the branch and two downstream guide passages 522b and 522c positioned downstream. .
In addition, the guide passage 522 is formed transparent (or translucent) so that the inside thereof can be visually recognized from the front side.

The upstream guide passage 522 a guides the game ball entered into the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 by the introduction portion 521 from the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the branch position of the guide passage 522 . The upstream guide passage 522 a is inclined downward from the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 toward the branch position of the guide passage 522 . Therefore, the game ball reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 along the upstream guide passage 522a utilizing the inclination of the upstream guide passage 522a.

The downstream guide passage 522b is provided at a position near the branch position of the guide passage 522. As shown in FIG. Further, the downstream guide passage 522b is formed along the vertically downward direction so as to drop the game ball from the branch position of the guide passage 522. As shown in FIG. The downstream guide passage 522b guides the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 along the upstream guide passage 522a to the discharge port 524.例文帳に追加
The downstream guide passage 522 c is provided at a position far from the branch position of the guide passage 522 . Further, the downstream side guide passage 522c is formed from the branch position of the guide passage 522 to the guide rail 525 for the game ball. The downstream guide passage 522c guides the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 along the upstream guide passage 522a to the guide rail 525 (see FIG. 4).

Here, the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 includes a detection sensor 40h (see FIG. 11) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 40h is arranged on the back side of the game board 31 . Specifically, the detection sensor 40h detects entry of a game ball into the downstream guide passage 522c. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, unlike when a ball enters the various winning holes. Also, the detection sensor 40h may be of any type as long as it can individually detect winning of game balls. For example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be employed.

The switching unit 523 supports a plate 523a provided on the game board 31 so as to close the entrance of the downstream guide passage 522c, and the plate 523a rotatably about an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. It has a pin 523b and a plate drive section 523c that drives the plate 523a.

The plate 523a rotates clockwise around the pin 523b, thereby closing the inlet of the downstream guide passage 522b (indicated by a two-dot chain line in the figure) and rotating counterclockwise around the pin 523b. As a result, the inlet of the downstream guide passage 522c is closed and the inlet of the downstream guide passage 522b is opened (solid line in the figure). In the closed state, the plate 523a is inclined downward toward the downstream guide passage 522c.
The plate driving section 523c sets the plate 523a to either a closed state or an open state by driving the plate 523a.

Therefore, when the plate 523a is set to the open state by the plate driving portion 523c, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided to the entrance of the downstream guide passage 522b and then to the discharge port 524. Guided (solid line in the figure). After that, the game ball is discharged to the outside (game area) of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the discharge port 524 (discharge route).
On the other hand, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state by the plate driving portion 523c, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 is downstream along the plate 523a using the inclination of the plate 523a. After being guided to the entrance of the side guide passage 522c, it is guided to the guide rail 525 (two-dot chain line in the figure). After that, the game ball is guided to the crew 53 through the guide rail 525 (see FIG. 4) (cruun route).

Here, the plate 523a is normally set to an open state (discharge route) in which game balls are not guided to the croon 53. Then, when the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the opening/closing execution mode is shifted, the plate 523a is set to a closed state (clown route) in which the game ball is guided to the cloon 53.
Further, the plate 523a is in an open state (ejection route) in which the game ball is not guided to the crew 53 when the detection sensor 40h described above detects the entry of the game ball into the downstream guide passage 522c. is set again to
Thus, in this embodiment, the crew 53, based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry ball of the game ball to the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37, the game ball flowing down the game area It functions as variable ball entry means that enables ball entry.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing movement of game balls in the discharge route and the crew route. Specifically, FIGS. 4(A) and (B) are diagrams showing the movement of game balls on the discharge route, and FIGS. 4(C) and (D) are diagrams showing the movement of game balls on the crew route is.
When the blade member 521a is set to the closed state, the game ball does not enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 as shown in FIG. 4(A) (see the arrow in the drawing). This is the same regardless of whether it is a discharge route or a crew route.

On the other hand, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state, the game ball, as shown in FIGS. The ball is entered into the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 by pressing.
When the discharge route is set by setting the plate 523a to the open state, the game ball reaching the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided to the discharge port 524 as shown in FIG. 4(B). (Refer to the arrow in the figure). After that, the game ball is discharged to the outside (game area) of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the discharge port 524 .

The game ball discharged to the outside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the discharge port 524 is changed in the falling direction by the nail 44, so that the upper operation port 36, the lower operation port 37, and the out port 39 I will enter the ball.
In this embodiment, the game ball discharged to the outside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 through the discharge port 524 enters the upper operation port 36, the lower operation port 37, and the out port 39. However, for example, it may be designed so that the ball enters only the out hole 39 . In short, the flow path of the game ball after being discharged to the game area may be designed in any way.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the game ball was discharged to the game area through the discharge port 524, but without being discharged to the game area, for example, the same route as the game ball that entered the out port 39 may be collected through

In addition, by setting the plate 523a to the closed state, when it is set to the crun route, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided to the guide rail 525 as shown in FIG. (See the arrow in the figure). After that, the game ball is guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525, as shown in FIG. 4(D).

FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the croon as seen from above.
As shown in FIG. 5, the croon 53 has a disk-shaped rolling surface 531 for rolling the game ball guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525, and is provided along the periphery of the rolling surface 531. side walls 532;
In addition, the guide rail 525 guides the game ball to the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532 .

The rolling surface 531 has three holes 533A to 533C which are formed at predetermined distances from the center thereof and which are equally spaced from each other. and a projecting portion 534 having three side surfaces that slope downward toward the 533C side. Further, the rolling surface 531 is inclined downward from the side wall 532 toward the holes 533A to 533C (see FIG. 4).
Therefore, the game ball guided to the rune 53 through the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C (Fig. See middle arrow A).

The holes 533A-533C are provided with detection sensors 40i-40k (see FIG. 11) for detecting the entry of game balls, and the detection sensors 40i-40k are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. FIG. Specifically, the detection sensor 40i detects the game ball entering the hole 533A, the detection sensor 40j detects the game ball entering the hole 533B, and the detection sensor 40k detects the game ball entering the hole 533C. To detect the entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, unlike when a ball enters each of the winning holes. Further, the detection sensors 40i to 40k may be of any kind as long as they can individually detect winning of game balls. For example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

Each of the holes 533A to 533C serves as an opportunity to start the round game when a transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the opening/closing execution mode is entered. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening and closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after shifting to the opening and closing execution mode, when a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the opening and closing door 38b is set to an open state, and execution of a predetermined number of round games is started.

Specifically, when a ball enters the hole 533A, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing the round game 16 times, so the hole 533A starts executing the round game 16 times. A mark is displayed around the hole 533A to suggest that.
Further, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing four round games when a ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. not marked to suggest that

In addition, the croon 53 is connected to a hole 533A formed on the front side (front side) of the game board 31, and as shown by an arrow B in the figure, a game ball that enters the hole 533A and falls downward. to the non-electric accessory 51, and two holes 533B and 533C formed on the back side (deep side) of the game board 31. A discharge passage 536 is provided for discharging the game balls that enter the 533B and 533C and fall downward into the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 2).

FIG. 6 is a view of the non-electric accessory viewed from the back side of the game board. FIG. 9 is a side view of the non-electric accessory.
As shown in FIGS. 6 and 9, the non-electric accessory 51 includes a pair of upper blade members 511 provided above the game board 31 so as to face each other in the horizontal direction, and a lower end portion of each upper blade member 511. A pair of rotating shafts 512 that are fixed and rotatable about an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31, a pair of plate-like bodies 513 that are fixed at one end to each rotating shaft 512, and a pair of upper gears 514 concentrically fixed to each pivot shaft 512 .

In addition, the non-electric accessory 51 is fixed to a pair of lower blade members 515 provided below each upper blade member 511 so as to face each other in the horizontal direction, and to the upper end portion of each lower blade member 515. A pair of rotating shafts 516 provided to be rotatable about an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the board 31, and a pair of rotating shafts 516 provided so as to mesh with the respective upper gears 514 and concentrically fixed to the respective rotating shafts 516. and a lower gear 517 of .

Each of the upper blade members 511 has a facing surface 511A arranged vertically and horizontally facing each other in the closed state of the non-electric accessory 51, as shown in FIG. 6(A). . Further, each upper blade member 511 is provided in the game area (the front side of the game board 31), as shown in FIG.
Each upper blade member 511 is provided so as to have a width such that a plurality of game balls cannot pass through passages 511B formed between the respective opposing surfaces 511A at the same time. In addition, the non-electric accessory 51 has a baffle plate 51A provided above the entrance of the passage 511B. The distance between the upper end of each upper blade member 511 and the baffle plate 51A is narrower than one game ball. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 51 is closed, the game ball cannot enter the non-electric accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B.
In addition, the non-electric accessory 51 has a cover 518 provided in the game area so as to cover the upper blade members 511 and the passage 511B.

Each plate-like body 513 is arranged at an obtuse angle with respect to the facing surface 511A of each upper blade member 511, as shown in FIG. 6(A). Specifically, when the non-electric accessory 51 is in the closed state, each plate-like body 513 is disposed so as to be inclined toward the passage 511B from the upper end to the lower end on the rotating shaft 512 side. . Here, each plate-like body 513 is provided on the back side of the game board 31, as shown in FIG. Specifically, the non-electric accessory 51 has a passage 51B that guides the game ball entering the non-electric accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B to the back side of the game board 31, and each plate-like body 513 , one end of which is fixed to each rotary shaft 512 so as to close the outlet of the passage 51B.

Each lower blade member 515 is arranged at an obtuse angle with respect to the facing surface 511A of each upper blade member 511, as shown in FIG. 6(A). Specifically, each lower blade member 515 is disposed so as to approach the passage 511B from the upper end toward the lower end of the rotating shaft 516 in the closed state of the non-electric accessory 51. . Each lower blade member 515 is provided on the back side of the game board 31, as shown in FIG. Specifically, each lower blade member 515 is provided at the passing position of the game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the communication passage 535 of the cloon 53 . Here, one end of each lower blade member 515 is fixed to each rotary shaft 516 so as to block the discharge port 535A of the communication passage 535 .

In this manner, the aforementioned connecting passage 535 of the croon 53 communicates above each lower blade member 515 .
Therefore, the game ball that enters the hole 533A of the croon 53, falls downward, and is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 535 is shown in FIG. Fall towards 515. Then, as shown in FIG. 6(B), the game ball dropped toward each lower blade member 515 rotates each lower blade member 515 around each rotation shaft 516, so that each lower blade member 515 are pushed apart (see arrow A in the figure).
After the lower ends of the lower blade members 515 are pushed apart, the game ball is discharged from the non-electric accessory 51 to the game area through the opening 312 through the discharge passage 51C.

In addition, since each rotating shaft 516 and each lower gear 517 rotate as each lower blade member 515 rotates, each upper gear 514 rotates as each lower gear 517 rotates. Each upper blade member 511 and each plate-like body 513 rotates as each upper gear 514 rotates (see arrow B in the figure). As a result, the non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Here, the non-electric accessory 51 has a non-electric accessory open detection sensor 519 (see FIG. 11) that detects that the closed state has shifted to the open state. Note that the non-electric accessory release detection sensor 519 may be of any type as long as it can detect the opening of the non-electric accessory 51. For example, a contact sensor or the like can be employed. .

The distance between the upper end of each upper blade member 511 and the baffle plate 51A is wider than one game ball in the open state of the non-electric accessory 51, as shown in FIG. 6(B). Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 51 is open, the game ball can enter the non-electric accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B.
Here, each plate-like body 513 rotates around each rotation shaft 512 so as to close the passage 51B in the open state of the non-electric accessory 51 .

Therefore, the game ball that entered the non-electric accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B is guided to the back side of the game board 31 through the passage 51B, and then each plate-like body centered around each rotation shaft 512. By rotating the plate-like bodies 513, the lower ends of the respective plate-like bodies 513 are spread apart.
After the lower ends of the plate-like bodies 513 are pushed apart, the game ball is discharged from the non-electric accessory 51 to the game area through the opening 312 through the discharge passage 51C.

In addition, since each rotating shaft 512 and each upper gear 514 rotate as each plate-like body 513 rotates, each lower gear 517 rotates as each upper gear 514 rotates. Each lower blade member 515 rotates as each lower gear 517 rotates. As a result, the non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

The non-electric accessary 51 is a chance to start the round game when it is elected in the internal lottery to shift to the opening/closing execution mode and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening and closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after shifting to the opening and closing execution mode, when a ball is entered into the non-electric accessory 51, the opening and closing door 38b is set to an open state, and execution of a predetermined number of round games is started.

Here, the entry of the ball into the non-electric accessory 51 is determined by detecting whether or not the game ball has passed through the discharge passage 51C with the detection sensor 40f. In other words, when the non-electric accessory 51 is open, the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B, and when the non-electric accessory 51 is closed, the communication passage 535 The game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 is both judged as entering the non-electric accessory 51 .

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing 16 round games when a ball is entered into the non-electric accessory 51, so that the non-electric accessory 51 has 16 rounds. The characters "16R" are displayed (see FIG. 2), which means that the execution of the game is to be started.
In the following description, the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A that start executing 16 round games are referred to as 16 round execution gates, and the holes 533B and 533C that start executing 4 round games are called 4 gates. These are called round execution gates, and 16-round execution gates and 4-round execution gates are also collectively called round game execution gates.

Therefore, the non-electric accessory 51 has an open state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is entered and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not entered. It functions as an opening and closing ball entry means that shifts from the open state to the closed state based on.
The non-electrical accessory 51 includes plate-like bodies 513 (first receiving portions) that receive the game ball that has entered the non-electrical accessory 51, and lower blade members 515 that receive the game ball that has entered the hole 533A. (second receiving portion), and by receiving the game ball with each plate-like body 513, the state is shifted from the open state to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball with each lower blade member 515, the closed state to the open state.

In this embodiment, the opening/closing ball entry means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving a game ball at the first receiving portion, and closes by receiving a game ball at the second receiving portion. It was transitioning from a state to an open state. On the other hand, the opening/closing ball-entering means includes, for example, a drive unit that sets the opening/closing ball-entering means to either a closed state or an open state, and a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball. The drive section may shift the opening/closing ball-entering means from the open state to the closed state based on the detection of the ball entry. In short, the opening/closing ball entry means has an open state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is entered and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and the open state is based on the entry of the game ball. to the closed state.

In addition, the croon 53 allows the game ball that has entered the croon 53 to enter, and the holes 533B and 533C (first A hole 533A (a second ball entry portion) and a hole 533A (a second ball entry portion) that allows a game ball that has entered the croon 53 to enter, and shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. part). This croon 53 has a rolling surface 531 for rolling the game ball that entered the croon 53, and the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion are provided on the rolling surface 531 and roll. A game ball rolling on a moving surface 531 is entered.

In this embodiment, the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the croon 53, and enter the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 531. . On the other hand, the first ball-entering section and the second ball-entering section distribute, for example, the game balls entered by the variable ball-entering means to the first ball-entering section and the second ball-entering section. It may be provided in the mechanism. In this case, the probabilities of allocating game balls to the first ball-entering section and the second ball-entering section in the distribution mechanism may be the same or different. In short, the variable ball-entering means should be provided with the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion.

Here, as described above, the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A are 16-round execution gates that initiate execution of 16-round games. Also, each hole 533B, 533C is a 4-round execution gate for starting execution of 4-round games. Therefore, the game in the opening/closing execution mode started when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is higher than the game in the opening/closing execution mode started when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. It gives value to players.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times (four times in this embodiment) when the game ball enters each of the holes 533B and 533C. A game in the opening/closing execution mode in which game balls can be paid out is started, and when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 is increased more than a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 16 times), a game in the opening/closing execution mode is started in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be put out.

In the present embodiment, the game in the opening/closing execution mode, which is started when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, is set by setting the number of times the variable winning device 38 opens and closes. A higher value is given to the player than the game in the open/close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the hole 533B, 533C. A higher value may be given to the player than the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the game ball. In short, the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entering means and the second ball entering portion is the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion. A value higher than the game should be given to the player.

Further, in this embodiment, the hole 533A is a 16-round execution gate for starting execution of 16 round games, each hole 533B, 533C is a 4-round execution gate for starting execution of 4 round games, and each hole The correspondence between 533A-533C and the 16-round and 4-round execution gates was fixed. On the other hand, the correspondence between the holes 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gates and 4-round execution gates does not have to be fixed. may According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the game playability, and can improve the attention of the player to the game.

7 and 8 are enlarged views of the vicinity of the non-electric accessory. Specifically, FIGS. 7A and 8A are diagrams showing a state in which a game ball has fallen toward the non-electric accessory 51 in the open state of the non-electric accessory 51. FIG. 7(B) and FIG. 8(B) are diagrams showing the subsequent flow of game balls.
The non-electric accessory 51, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, includes a rotation distribution mechanism 51D provided on the upper left of the baffle plate 51A.
The rotation distribution mechanism 51D includes a rotation shaft 51D1 attached to the game board 31 so as to be rotatable around an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31, and a rotation shaft 51D1 formed at equal intervals around the rotation shaft 51D1. and a stopper 51D3 provided below the rotary shaft 51D1.

Among the three rotating blades 51D2, the upper rotating blade 51D2 is in a state where the right rotating blade 51D2 is in contact with the stopper 51D3, as shown in FIG. It inclines so as to approach the accessory 51. - 特許庁
In this state, the game ball that has fallen through the left side of the windmill located on the upper right of the rotation distribution mechanism 51D is divided into the upper rotating blade 51D2 and the left rotating blade 51D2 among the three rotating blades 51D2. (See the arrow in FIG. 7(A)).

The game ball dropped between the upper rotating vane 51D2 and the left rotating vane 51D2 rotates the rotating shaft 51D1 counterclockwise via the rotating vane 51D2 as shown in FIG. 7(B). After that, the ball passes through the left side of the non-electric accessory 51 without entering the non-electric accessory 51 (see the arrow in FIG. 7(B)). Then, of the three rotating blades 51D2, the left rotating blade 51D2 comes into contact with the stopper 51D3. As a result, the rotating shaft 51D1 stops rotating. It should be noted that the game ball that has passed through the left side of the non-electric accessory 51 enters the out port 39 thereafter.

On the other hand, among the three rotating blades 51D2, the upper rotating blade 51D2 is in a state where the left rotating blade 51D2 is in contact with the stopper 51D3, as shown in FIG. 8A. It inclines so as to go away from the non-electric accessory 51 as it goes.
In this state, the game ball that has fallen through the left side of the windmill located on the upper right of the rotation distribution mechanism 51D is divided into the upper rotating blade 51D2 and the right rotating blade 51D2 among the three rotating blades 51D2. (See the arrow in FIG. 8(A)).

After the game ball dropped between the upper rotary vane 51D2 and the right rotary vane 51D2 rotates the rotary shaft 51D1 clockwise through the rotary vane 51D2 as shown in FIG. , the ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 (see the arrow in FIG. 8(B)). Then, of the three rotating blades 51D2, the right rotating blade 51D2 comes into contact with the stopper 51D3. As a result, the rotating shaft 51D1 stops rotating.

In this way, the rotation distribution mechanism 51D distributes the game balls that have fallen toward the non-electric accessory 51 to the left and right according to its own rotation, and the left route that does not allow the game ball to enter the non-electric accessory 51. , and the right route for entering the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51 alternately.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can make it difficult for the game ball that has fallen toward the non-electric accessory 51 against the player's intention to enter the non-electric accessory 51, thereby realizing the player's intention. It can be easily reflected.

In this embodiment, only the first stage rotation distribution mechanism 51D is provided, but a second stage rotation distribution mechanism 51D may be provided, and third and subsequent stage rotation distribution mechanisms 51D may be further provided. may According to this, it is possible to make it more difficult for the game ball that has fallen toward the non-electric role object 51 against the player's intention to enter the non-electric role object 51, thereby further fulfilling the player's intention. It can be easily reflected.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the rotation distribution mechanism 51D distributes the game balls that have fallen toward the non-electric accessory 51 to the left and right according to their own rotation, but the game balls are distributed using a method other than rotation. may be distributed.

FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display screen of the pattern display device.
As shown in FIG. 10, the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is divided into three columns of display areas. Column Z3 is displayed. In each pattern row Z1 to Z3, 8 kinds of patterns consisting of numbers "1" to "8" are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and "8" is followed by "1". configured as follows. Note that in FIG. 10, the center line of each display area is indicated by a dashed line.

The symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. By starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game round is executed on the display screen G. - 特許庁The effect for this game round is switched from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and finally, predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed on the effective line L. end with a state
In other words, the game cycle means the period from when the main display unit 45 and the pattern display device 47 start the variable display based on the wins to the operation ports 36 and 37 until the predetermined stop result is displayed.

It should be noted that the pattern display device 47 is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily selected. For example, the number of symbol rows, the direction of scrolling of each symbol row, the number of symbols of each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns in each pattern row may be a combination of a picture and a number instead of only numbers, or may be a picture only.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 11, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 for executing payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out game balls, and a power source/power source for executing shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. and a launch control device 80, which are mounted on the back pack unit.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. Note that the main controller 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may comprise marking means for marking upon its opening and may comprise marking structures for marking upon its opening. Specifically, as trace means, a circuit board box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting part (crimped part) that requires breaking of a predetermined part when separating each case body is provided, or a structure that peels off At this time, it is possible to adopt a structure in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off because the adhesive layer remains on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Also, as the trace structure, it is possible to employ a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 that constitute the MPU 62 . Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 63 and RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip.
In this embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of other controllers other than the main controller 60 .

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a win/fail table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, and a reach table storage area 63c. These areas are described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 64 has various areas such as a various counter area 64a, a reserved ball storage area 64b, and an electrical work reservation area 64c. These areas are described in detail later.

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 65 provided in the main control device 60, a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40k, and a non-electric accessory open detection sensor 519. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. Further, the output ports of the MPU 62 include an electric accessory drive unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation port 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a blade member. It is connected to the blade member drive section 521c that opens and closes the plate 521a, the plate drive section 523c that opens and closes the plate 523a, the main display section 45, and the accessory display section .

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory 37a. Further, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c to open and close the big winning opening 38a. Further, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the blade member driving section 521c to open and close the blade member 521a. In the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the plate driving section 523c to open/close the plate 523a. Also, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winnings to the operation ports 36 and 37 . Further, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display section 46 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41 .

The blackout monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable DC voltage of 24 volts output from the power supply/launch control device 80. . Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power through the blackout monitoring board 65 .
The detection sensors 40a to 40k detect the general winning port 35, the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, various winning ports of the variable winning device 38, the out port 39, each through gate 41, and the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. Also, they are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the holes 533A to 533C of the clone 53. As shown in FIG. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40k, the MPU 62 performs various prize winning openings, the outlet 39, each through gate 41, the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and each hole 533A to 533C of the crew 53. Judgment (entering ball judgment) is performed. Note that the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 .

The payout control device 70 executes payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls to be lent to players during games) based on commands (control instructions) transmitted from the main control device 60. do.

The power supply/launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, the power supply/launch control device 80 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 61 and the payout control device 70 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, and the generated operation supply power. The power/launch control device 80 includes a power failure power supply unit such as a backup capacitor. This power-off power supply unit supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted.

In addition, the power supply/shooting control device 80 executes shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. Here, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 includes a shooting rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device for supplying game balls stored in the upper tray 25a onto the shooting rail, and a and a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34 . The power supply/launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to the solenoid to launch the game ball when a predetermined launch condition is met.

<Electrical Configuration for Execution of Internal Lottery by MPU 62 of Main Control Unit 60>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 12, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the big win random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, uses the big win type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the big win, and determines whether to generate the ready-to-win display. , the reach random number counter C3 is used. Also, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variation type counter CS to determine the display continuation time on the main display section 45 and the symbol display device 47. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory open counter C4 for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation port 37 is set to the electric role open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4 are provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 (see FIG. 11).

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Of the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 11) provided as acquired information storage means. In addition, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 is stored in the electric role holding area 64c (see FIG. 11) of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 41. be done.

The reserved ball storage area 64b includes a first result display section reservation area Ra, a second result display section reservation area Rb, and an execution area AE.

The first result display holding area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means has four storage areas of a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4. Each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reservation information in time series to each area Ra1 to Ra4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36. store it. Specifically, when the winning to the upper working port 36 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 62 outputs the pending information in the order of the first area Ra1→second area Ra2→third area Ra3→fourth area Ra4. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the first result display portion reservation area Ra includes four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls to the upper operation opening 36 are reserved. In addition, the first result display reserved area Ra includes storage areas for writing the reserved numbers stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
In addition, the number of reservations related to the upper working port 36 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. may

The second result display holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means comprises four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reservation information in time series to each area Rb1 to Rb4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37. store it. Specifically, when the winning to the lower opening 37 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 62 outputs the pending information in the order of the first area Rb1→second area Rb2→third area Rb3→fourth area Rb4. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the second result display portion reservation area Rb has four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls into the lower operation opening 37 are reserved. In addition, the second result display portion reservation area Rb includes a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
In addition, the number of reserves related to the lower working port 37 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. may

The execution area AE stores the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb when starting the variable display of each of the result display portions 45a and 45b. This is the area to move the .

The electrician reservation area 64c includes four storage areas, like the first result display reservation area Ra and the second result display reservation area Rb. Therefore, the winning of game balls to each through gate 41 is reserved up to four.
The number of pending gates 41 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more. may

<Detailed description of each counter>
The details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 250. ing.
The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41. be.
Then, based on the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64c, the MPU 62 draws a lottery (electric role object release lottery).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes with mutually different frequencies of enabling game balls to enter the lower operation opening 37 by setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric role product 37a to the open state is relatively low, and the frequency of setting the electric role product 37a to the open state is low. and a relatively high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

The low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery (for example, both 4/5). However, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state more times when the electric role open state is won, and the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. The opening time of one time to do is also getting longer. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state between each opening in the one-time electrical open state is shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (role The duration of one fluctuation display in the object display section 46) is shortened.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, game balls are more likely to enter the lower operation opening 37 as compared with the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning in the upper working opening 36 than in the lower working opening 37 . In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball will enter the lower operating port 37 is higher than the upper operating port 36.例文帳に追加
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the lower operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.

Note that the configurations of the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are not limited to this. For example, the high frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery as compared to the low frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of reserved time may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that it is easier to select a shorter reserved time than the low-frequency support mode, and the average of the selected reserved time may be configured to be shortened. Furthermore, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode changes the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state to the low frequency support mode. may be configured to be relatively high compared to .

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 599. . Also, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value each time it loops. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, like the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is transferred to the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 36, and the game ball wins the lower operation port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit (win/fail lottery) based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a success/failure table storing values of random numbers for winning a big win.
Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a (see FIG. 11) of the ROM 63 provided as the hit/fail information group storage means, as shown in FIG. (whether or not information group).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two winning lottery modes, a low probability mode (low probability state) in which it is difficult to win a big win and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which it is easy to win a big win. . The success/failure table includes a success/failure table for the low-probability mode (low-probability success/failure information group) shown in FIG. group).
The MPU 62 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit by comparing these win/fail tables with the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

These hit/fail tables have lottery results (hit/fail results) of occurrence of a plurality of jackpots, such as "big win win", "special loss result", and "ordinary loss result".
Specifically, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of a big win, as shown in FIG. is.
On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. is. Here, the value of the random number for winning the jackpot stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is included in the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode.

The value and number of random numbers stored in each success/failure table are arbitrary, and it is sufficient that the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a "big win" than the low probability mode. Further, the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode must not include the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Alternatively, it may include a part of the random number values that are stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode and become the "big win".

In addition, in each win/fail lottery mode, random numbers other than "big win winning" results in a loss without winning a big win.
Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of loss results, ie, the "special loss result (small win result)" and the "normal loss result". These outliers are common in that none of them serve as a trigger for shifting to the lottery mode or the support mode. However, the difference is that the "special deviation result" serves as a trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, whereas the "normal deviation result" does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 29. .
The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display portion of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operation port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operation port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (distribution lottery) for the jackpot type when the jackpot occurs.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an allocation table storing random number values relating to allocation destinations of types of jackpots.
As shown in FIG. 14, the values of random numbers related to the allocation destination of the jackpot type are stored in the allocation table (see FIG. 11) in the allocation table storage area 63b (see FIG. 11) of the ROM 63 provided as the allocation information group storage means. minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 14(a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 14(b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes a jackpot type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

In the first distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the reservation area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the upper operation port 36 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
As shown in FIG. 14A, the first distribution table includes "low probability result (special distribution result corresponding to low probability)", "non-explicit small round high probability result (latency high probability result corresponding to small round )”, “explicit small-round high-probability result (high-probability result corresponding to few-rounds)”, and “most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high-probability)” are the distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are distributed to “low probability results”, and “10 to 14” are distributed to “unspecified low ``15 to 19'' are assigned to ``Highly Probable Round Results'', and ``20 to 29'' are assigned to ``Most Favorable Results''.

In the second distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the second result display portion reservation area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the lower operation port 37 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
The second distribution table, as shown in FIG. 14(b), has two distribution results of "low probability result" and "best result" as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are distributed to “low probability results”, and “10 to 29” are the “best results” ”.

Each distribution result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Winner lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (2) Support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (3) Aspect of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 38 in the opening/closing execution mode

First, the difference between the lottery modes (1) will be described.
The "low-probability result" is a distribution result in which the win-or-fail lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/failure lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.
"Unexplained few rounds high probability result", "Explicit few rounds high probability result", and "Most favorable result" are high probability of winning lottery mode after opening and closing execution mode regardless of the winning lottery mode before closing execution mode. This is the distribution result set in the mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

Next, the difference in support mode (2) will be described.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode shifts to a low-frequency support mode when the game times reach the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

The “non-explicit few rounds high probability result” is a sorting result that maintains the support mode before the end of the open/close execution mode. Here, if the support mode before the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues at least until "big win" is won in the lottery.
The "explicit few rounds high probability result" and "most advantageous result" are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

The difference in the opening/closing control mode of the variable winning device 38 in the opening/closing execution mode (3) will be described in detail later.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 238. .
The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display portion reservation area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 36, and the game ball wins the lower operation port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) to determine whether to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The ready-to-win display is an expectation effect that occurs when the winning lottery does not result in a "big hit" but results in a "normal failure".
Specifically, the MPU 62 determines the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reach table and the reserved ball storage area 64b when the result of the win/fail lottery does not result in a "big hit" but results in a "normal loss". By comparing with, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to generate the ready-to-win display, and when the ready-to-win display is to be generated in this lottery, the ready-to-win display is generated. The ready-to-win table is a table that stores random numbers associated with occurrence of the ready-to-win display, and is stored in the ready-to-win table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 (see FIG. 11).

Here, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result. A combination of symbols having a number of is stopped on the activated line L. In addition, when "big win winning" is obtained in the winning lottery and "low probability result" is distributed in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 displays a combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result. is stopped on the valid line L. In addition, if it becomes "jackpot winning" in the winning lottery and is distributed to "unspecified small round high probability result" or "explicit small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, or "jackpot winning" in the lottery lottery In the event that a "special failure result" is obtained without becoming, the symbol display device 47 selects a "normal failure result" in the winning lottery instead of a combination of symbols having the same number as the stop result. A special combination of symbols having numbers different from each other, which will never be displayed, is stopped on the activated line L. - 特許庁

The reach display is when the combination of symbols with the same number is finally stopped and displayed (it becomes a "big hit" in the winning lottery, and is distributed to the "best result" or "low probability result" in the distribution lottery. ), it occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is used when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed ("jackpot winning" in the winning lottery, "unspecified small round high probability result" or "explicit small round high probability" in the distribution lottery) In the case of being sorted to "probable result" or "special losing result" instead of "big hit winning" in the winning lottery), it does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In the ready-to-win display mode, some of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (for example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) are displayed on the activated line L. By causing the stationary display, the same combination of symbols is displayed to indicate the result of stopping, and in that state, the remaining symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z2) are variably displayed.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 generates the ready-to-win display, after the variable display is started on the pattern display device 47, and before displaying the predetermined stop result, the winning lottery results in a "jackpot winning", It is possible to make the player expect that the lottery will be sorted to the "low probability result" or the "best result" in the sorting lottery.

Note that the ready-to-win display mode is not limited to this, and a part of the symbol rows are stopped and displayed, and the remaining symbol rows are variably displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed in the background as a moving image. Alternatively, each pattern row may be reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like may be displayed on substantially the entire display screen G as a moving image.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the pattern display device 47. - 特許庁The expectation effect is such that the player expects that he or she has won a "big win" in the lottery after the start of the variable display on the symbol display device 47 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed. I mean performance. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expectation effects, namely, the aforementioned ready-to-win display and advance notice display.

The notice display will not be "jackpot winning" in the lottery if it becomes "jackpot winning" in the lottery, or if it becomes "special losing result" without becoming "jackpot winning" in the lottery lottery. This is an expected effect that makes the effect more likely to occur than in the case of the "normal deviation result". Instead of facilitating the occurrence of effects, this advance notice display may facilitate the selection of effects with a low appearance rate, or may be combined.
While the lottery to determine whether or not to generate the ready-to-win display is performed by the main control device 60, the lottery to determine whether to generate the advance notice display is performed by the sound emission control device 90. .

The mode of the advance notice display is that of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed, and some of the symbol rows (for example, symbol row Z1) is stopped on the activated line L, and a plurality of symbol rows (for example, symbol rows Z2, Z3) are variably displayed or ready-to-win display is generated, a predetermined character etc. are displayed on the display screen G as moving images. This notice display occurs both when the reach display is generated and when the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. It is
Note that the advance notice display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed, and the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed and displayed.

Finally, the fluctuation type counter CS will be explained. For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 198. .
The fluctuation type counter CS is updated at least once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time it is updated.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the pattern display duration on the main display section 45 and the pattern display duration on the pattern display device 47 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer. These display durations will be described later in detail.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing that advances the game, and main processing that is activated when the power is turned on. Timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order below.
In addition to timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In timer interrupt processing, the MPU 62 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S106, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes reading processing of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40k. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40k, judges the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 40a to 40d corresponding to various winning ports have detected the winning of game balls, it sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize balls, and sets this set prize ball command. A command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected the winning of game balls, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is the specific unit number to the payout control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

Further, in step S101, the MPU 62 executes the reading process of the non-electric accessary product open detection sensor 519. FIG. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the state of the non-electric accessory release detection sensor 519, determines the state, and stores it in the RAM 64 as non-electric accessory release information. When the MPU 62 determines that the non-electric accessory opening detection sensor 519 has detected the opening of the non-electric accessory 51, it executes a predetermined process. This predetermined processing will be described later in detail.

In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. do. Note that the MPU 62 returns the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0 and clears it if it reaches the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI.

In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to each of the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessary product release counter C4 and updates them. The subsequent value is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Note that the MPU 62 returns the values of the counters C1 to C4 to 0 and clears them when the previous values of the counters C1 to C4 have reached the maximum value when 1 is added thereto.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for through. In this through winning process, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40g corresponding to each through gate 41 has detected the winning of the game ball, the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric service reservation area 64c. Also, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the third suspension lamp portion 49 c and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90 .
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 turns on the third suspension lamp part 49c based on a command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Further, the number of reserved game balls that have won the through gate 41 is, as described above, a maximum of four, and the third reservation lamp portion 49c is lit by the number corresponding to this reserved number.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes winning processing for the round game execution gate.
Winning processing for the round game execution gate will be described in detail below.

<Winning process for round game execution gate>
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of winning processing for the round game execution gate.
In the winning process for the round game execution gate, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S204 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 executes 16 rounds by determining whether or not the detection sensors 40f and 40i corresponding to the 16 round execution gates (non-electric accessory 51 and hole 533A) have detected entry of game balls. It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the gate.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has entered the 16-round execution gate, it sets a 16-round execution flag in the RAM 64 in step S202. This 16-round execution flag is a flag for specifying that the ball has entered the 16-round execution gate. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the round game execution gate.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the 16-round execution gate, in step S203, it corresponds to the 4-round execution gate (hole 533B and hole 533C). By determining whether or not the detection sensors 40j and 40k have detected the entry of the game ball, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the 4th round execution gate.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has entered the 4-round execution gate, it sets a 4-round execution flag in the RAM 64 in step S204. This 4-round execution flag is a flag for specifying that the ball has entered the 4-round execution gate. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the round game execution gate.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has not entered the 4th round execution gate, the MPU 62 does not execute the processing after step S204, and the winning prize for the round game execution gate is determined. End the process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt processing, the processing after step S106 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S106, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for the working opening.
The prize winning process for the operating port will be described in detail below.

<Winning process for operating port>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening.
In the winning process for the working opening, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S307 as shown in FIG.

In step S301, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 40b corresponding to the upper operation port 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether the game ball has won the upper operation port 36 (start winning). determine whether When the MPU 62 determines in step S301 that the game ball has won in the upper working port 36, in step S302, it grasps the number of reserved balls stored in the reserved area Ra for the first result display section, and reserves the number of balls. The number is set in a predetermined storage area in the first result display section reservation area Ra as the first start-up reservation storage number RaN. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S305.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S301 that the game ball has not entered the upper operating port 36, in step S303, the detection sensor 40c corresponding to the lower operating port 37 detects the winning of the game ball. is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the lower operation opening 37 (start winning).
When the MPU 62 determines in step S303 that the game ball has not entered the lower working opening 37, it ends the winning processing for the working opening. In addition, when the MPU 62 determines that the game ball has won the lower operation opening 37 in step S303, in step S304, the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is grasped, The pending number is set in a predetermined storage area in the second result display portion pending area Rb as a second start pending storage number RbN. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S305.

After executing the process of step S302 or step S304, the MPU 62 determines in step S305 that the number of start suspension memories N (RaN or RbN) set in step S302 or step S304 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine whether or not there is
When the MPU 62 determines in step S305 that the number N of start suspension memories is not less than the upper limit value, it ends the prize winning process for the operation port. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S305 that the start pending memory number N is less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the value of the start pending memory number N and updates it in step S306.

In step S307, the MPU 62 stores a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process out of the free storage area of the reservation area for the result display section. The suspension information is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the start suspension storage number N updated in step S306.

For example, when the MPU 62 sets the first start pending memory number RaN in step S302, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process A set of values is stored as pending information in the first storage area of the empty storage areas in the first result display portion pending area Ra, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the first start pending storage number RaN updated in step S306. For example, when the MPU 62 sets "3" to the first start pending memory number RaN in step S302, the MPU 62 stores "4" in the first start pending memory number RaN updated in step S306 in the storage area corresponding to "4". Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

Also, for example, when the MPU 62 sets the second start pending memory number RbN in step S304, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process are stored as suspension information in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second result display section suspension area Rb, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension storage number RbN updated in step S306. do. For example, when the MPU 62 sets "3" to the second start pending memory number RbN in step S304, the MPU 62 stores the second start pending memory number RbN in the storage area corresponding to "4" updated in step S306. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

Also, in step S307, the MPU 62 sets a command for turning on the first reservation lamp section 49a or the second reservation lamp section 49b, and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the prize winning process for the operating port.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 turns on the first reservation lamp section 49a or the second reservation lamp section 49b based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62 . In addition, the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36 or the lower operation opening 37 is, as described above, a maximum of four pieces, and the first reservation lamp portion 49a or the second reservation lamp portion 49b is this reservation number The corresponding number of lights up.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is the main process for advancing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S414 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S401 to S409 at a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S408 to S411 when a remaining time occurs, and executes step S412 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S408. Run.

In step S401, the MPU 62 executes timer interrupt processing or external output processing for transmitting a command set in the previous normal processing to each sub-side control device. In this external output process, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and if it determines that the prize ball command is set, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 70 Send. Further, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a command for effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game round or a command corresponding to the effect for the open/close execution mode is set, and the command for effect is determined. When it is determined that it is set, the command for that effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

In step S402, the MPU 62 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. . In addition, when the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S403, the MPU 62 executes game round control processing for advancing the game round. In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes a win/fail lottery and a sorting lottery, determines information related to a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the pattern display device 47, and determines a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. decision of information related to
In step S404, the MPU 62 executes game state transition processing for shifting the game state. In the game state transition processing, the MPU 62 executes transition processing to each game state such as the opening/closing execution mode, the high probability mode, and the high frequency support mode.
The game round control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be described later in detail.

In step S405, the MPU 62 executes demonstration display execution determination processing. In this demonstration display execution determination process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 seconds) for starting a demonstration has elapsed without a new game round being started after the game round has ended. However, when it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .
Note that the sound emission control device 90 starts the demonstration display execution process based on the demonstration command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S405 is executed. For example, if the start waiting period is 30 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S405 is 4 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S405 is executed, and when it reaches 7500 times, the start waiting period is determined to have passed. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. Further, when the MPU 62 starts a new game cycle while counting the number of execution times of the process of step S405, the count value is reset.

In step S<b>406 , the MPU 62 executes an electric support process for executing drive control of the electric accessory 37 a provided in the lower working port 37 . In this electric role support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric role product opening lottery based on the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64, and the electric role product opening lottery. When winning, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. Further, the MPU 62 performs display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery.

In step S407, the MPU 62 executes game ball launch control processing. In this game ball shooting control process, the MPU 62 causes the power supply/shooting control device 80 to execute shooting control for shooting a game ball based on the rotation of the shooting handle 27 by the player. Specifically, the power supply/shooting control device 80 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a predetermined cycle (0.6 sec in this embodiment). . In addition, the solenoid is energized so as to shoot the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 27 . Further, the power supply/shooting control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot the game ball when a predetermined shooting condition is met.

In step S408, the MPU 62 determines whether a power failure flag is set in a power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64 or not. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 when a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitor board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62 . The power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal when it confirms the occurrence of power failure. This power failure flag is cleared when the main process is executed next time.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 or the like, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power outage flag by substituting 1 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 and clears the power outage flag by substituting 0 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 .

When the MPU 62 determines in step S408 that the power failure flag is set, the MPU 62 executes the power failure processing from step S412 onward without executing the processing from step S409 onward. Specifically, in step S412, the MPU 62 prohibits the generation of timer interrupt processing. In step S413, the MPU 62 calculates and stores a RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 64). In step S414, MPU62 prohibits the access to RAM64. After that, the MPU 62 continues the infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S408 that the power outage flag has not been set, in step S409 it determines whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived, that is, whether the current normal process has It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S409 that the timing for executing the next normal process has not yet arrived, that is, when the remaining time has occurred, in step S410, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S411. , the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 62 repeats steps S408 to S411 until it determines in step S409 that it is time to execute the next normal process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S409 that it is time to execute the next normal process, that is, if the remaining time does not occur, the next normal process is executed by executing step S401 again. Begin normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main processing.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S512 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 executes start-up processing upon power-on. In this start-up process, the MPU 62 waits for a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) after the power is turned on in order to wait for the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) to become operable. ) has passed.

In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec, which is the permission prohibition period, has elapsed. When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that 1 sec has not elapsed, it repeats the process of step S502. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has elapsed in step S502, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S503.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S502 is executed. For example, if the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S502 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S502 is executed and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when the number reaches 10000 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary. For example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S503, MPU62 permits the access to RAM64.
In step S504, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power/emission control device 80 is turned on.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S504 that the RAM erase switch is turned on, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S509 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S504 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, it determines in step S505 whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64. do.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S505 that the power failure flag has not been set, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S509.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S505, it calculates the RAM determination value in step S506.
In step S507, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether the RAM determination value calculated in step S506 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S506 with the RAM determination value saved in step S413 (power failure processing) of normal processing, and if they match, , the RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

When the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S507, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S509.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is normal in step S507, it clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S508.

The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method of confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by determining in the main processing whether or not the keyword has been written normally.

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S504, determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S505, or determines that the RAM determination value is not normal, the processing from step S509 is executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S509, and initializes the RAM 64 in step S510.

Therefore, for example, the administrator of the game hall can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch at the start of business of the game hall. Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the occurrence of a power failure is not confirmed by the power failure monitoring board 65 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S508 or step S510, the MPU 62 transmits an initial command to the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) in step S511, and timer interrupt in step S512. Allow the process to occur, and shift to the above-described normal process.
By receiving the initial command transmitted in step S511, the sub-side control board recognizes that communication with the main control board 61 is being performed normally, and executes its own initialization. do.

<Game Round Control Processing>
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game round control process.
In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S609 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the game is in the opening/closing execution mode, it ends the game round control process without executing the processes after step S602. Therefore, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game cycle regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to the operation ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress by referring to the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 . The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the opening/closing execution mode flag when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, and clears the opening/closing execution mode flag when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress, in step S602 it determines whether the main display section 45 is performing variable display, that is, whether the game round is in progress. Determine whether or not
When the MPU 62 determines in step S602 that the main display section 45 is not performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round start processing in steps S603 to S605.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S602 that the main display section 45 is performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game cycle progressing process in steps S606 to S609.

First, the processing for starting a game round in steps S603 to S605 will be described.
In step S603, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reservations stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra and the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb, and these numbers of reservations is equal to or less than "0". When the MPU 62 determines in step S603 that the total number CRN is equal to or less than "0", it ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S603 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, in step S604, the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area A data setting process is executed to set the pending information stored in Rb for completion of game rounds. After that, in step S605, the MPU 62 causes the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to start variable display, executes a variation start process for finishing the game round, and ends the game round control process.
The data setting process in step S604 and the variation start process in step S605 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S711 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start reservation memory number RbN in the second result display section reservation area Rb set in step S304 of the operation port winning process is "0" or less. do. When the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the second start pending memory number RbN is equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S702 to S706, and proceeds to step S701. If it is determined that the second start pending memory number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", data setting processing for the second result display section of steps S707 to S711 is executed.

In this way, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section for completing the game cycle, and the data setting processing for the second result display section. and a data setting process for the second result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Rb for completion of the game cycle.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the second start pending storage number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 does not execute the data setting process for the first result display section. Execute the data setting process for In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, the upper operation opening 36 The reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is preferentially played regardless of whether or not there is reservation information stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra based on the winning of the game ball. Set for one digestion.

First, data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S702 to S706 will be described.
In step S702, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start pending storage number RaN in the first result display portion pending area Ra to update the value.
In step S703, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display portion pending area Ra to the execution area AE.
In step S704, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information in the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the pending information in the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the pending information in the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra1. Shift to area Ra3.

At step S705, the MPU 62 clears the second result display flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG. This second result display section flag is a flag for specifying which main display section 45, out of the first result display section 45a and the second result display section 45b, starts the variable display when completing a game round. is. In this step S705, the MPU 62 clears the second result display section flag, so that when the game round is completed, the variable display is made on the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball into the upper working hole 36. indicates that the

In step S706, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift indicates that the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first holding lamp portion 49a based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the lighting number of the first reservation lamp portion 49a as the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36 decreases.

Next, data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S707 to S711 will be described.
In step S707, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start pending storage number RbN in the second result display portion pending area Rb to update it.
In step S708, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display portion pending area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S709, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the second result display portion pending area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the pending information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, shifts the pending information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third Shift to area Rb3.

In step S710, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag in the RAM 64. FIG. In this step S710, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag, so that when the game cycle is completed, the second result display section 45b displays a variable display based on the winning of the game ball into the lower operation opening 37. indicates that the

In step S711, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift indicates that the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second holding lamp portion 49b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the lighting number of the second reservation lamp portion 49b as the number of reserved game balls that have entered the lower opening 37 decreases.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the fluctuation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S818 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the high-probability mode, in step S802, the win/fail table for the low-probability mode (see FIG. 13A) is stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. If it is determined in step S801 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the win/fail table for the high-probability mode (see FIG. 13(b)) is read out from the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 in step S803. read out.

After executing the process of step S802 or step S803, the MPU 62 executes the suitability determination process in step S804. In this success/failure determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the success/failure table read out in step S802 or step S803 to obtain the result of the success/failure lottery (result of success/failure). judge. In addition, as described above, the winning result is one of "big win winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result". The same is true for

In step S805, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning result determined in step S804 is "big hit". If the MPU 62 determines in step S805 that the win/loss result is "jackpot winning", it executes the processing from step S806 onward, and if it determines that the win/loss result is not "jackpot winning" in step S805 , the processing after step S812 is executed.

First, in step S805, the processing (processing after step S806) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the winning result is "big hit winning" will be described.
In step S806, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display flag is set in the RAM 64. FIG.

When the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S806, the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36 starts the variable display. Therefore, in step S807, the first distribution table (see FIG. 14A) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63. FIG.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S806, the second result display section 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower opening 37 , the second sorting table (see FIG. 14B) is read from the sorting table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 in step S808.

After performing the process of step S807 or step S808, MPU62 performs a distribution determination process in step S809. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read out in step S807 or step S808 to determine the result of the distribution lottery ( distribution result).

In step S810, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In this stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines in step S809 the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45. A decision is made according to the sorting result, and the decided information is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 compares the distribution result determined in step S809 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 63, and determines the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. Determine relevant information. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 so as to be different for each sorting result.

In step S811, the MPU 62 sets a flag in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result determined in step S809. Specifically, when the MPU 62 specifies that the distribution result is a "low probability result", it sets a low probability result flag and specifies that it is a "non-explicit small round high probability result" , set the non-explicit small round high-probability result flag, and if it is specified as "explicit small-round high-probability result", set the explicit small-round high-probability result flag, and set the "most favorable result" , then set the best result flag. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S816.
In addition, in each of the following processes, the MPU 62 executes determination of the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, the process (process after step S812) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the win/loss result is not the "big hit win" at step S805 will be described.
In step S812, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S804 is the "special losing result".
If the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that the win/loss result is the "special failure result", it executes the processing from step S813 onwards, and if it determines that the success/failure result is not the "special failure result" in step S812. , the process after step S815 is executed.

In step S813, the MPU 62 executes stop result setting processing for the special outlier result. In this stop result setting process for the special outlier result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for special outlier results stored in advance in the ROM 63 to determine information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 . The mode of the picture set in the stop result table for the special winning result is different from the mode of the picture set in the stop result table for the big win result.
At step S814, the MPU 62 sets a special out flag in the RAM 64. FIG.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result" by referring to this special loss flag.

On the other hand, in step S815, the MPU 62 executes the stop result setting process for the normal deviation result. In this stop result setting process for the out-of-normal result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for the normal outlier result stored in the ROM 63 in advance, thereby determining information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 . The mode of the picture set in the stopping result table for the normal losing result is different from the mode of the picture set in the stopping result table for the jackpot result and the stopping result table for the special losing result.

After executing any one of steps S811, S814, and S815, the MPU 62 executes display duration time (display duration) setting processing in step S816.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64 .

In addition, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the symbol display device 47 will display the ready-to-win state. Specifically, when the sorting result determined in step S809 is "low probability result" or "best result", and the success/failure result determined in step S804 is "normal deviation result" At the same time, when winning the ready-to-win generation lottery, it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs. In addition, as described above, the MPU 62 compares the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. Run a reach generation lottery.

When the MPU 62 determines that the reach display occurs, the change type counter obtained from the change type counter buffer by referring to the reach generation display duration table stored in the reach display table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 A display continuation time corresponding to the value of CS is determined, and the determined display continuation time is set in a display continuation time counter provided in various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64 .
On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 62 refers to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, so that the change type counter A display continuation time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired from the buffer is determined, and the determined display continuation time is set in a display continuation time counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM64.

Specifically, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shortened as the pending number increases. Therefore, the display continuation time for consuming the pending information related to the upper working port 36 is set to be shorter as the number of pending items related to the upper working port 36 increases. The display continuation time when the pending information relating to the lower operating port 37 is consumed is set to be shorter as the number of pending items relating to the lower operating port 37 increases. Further, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shorter when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode than when it is the low-frequency support mode. In other words, if the pending number is the same, the display duration time in the high-frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode.
Furthermore, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table.

In addition, the reach non-occurrence display duration table may be set to a relationship opposite to the above-described relationship, such as the display duration becomes longer as the number of holds increases, depending on the number of holds and support mode It may be configured so that it does not fluctuate. Alternatively, the display duration table may be set individually for each of the win/fail result and the sorting result.

At step S817, the MPU 62 sets the variation command and the type command. The MPU 62 transmits the command for variation and the type command set in step S817 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.

The variation command includes information related to display duration. Also, the variation command does not include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach generation display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table are mutually different.
Therefore, even if the variation command does not include the information on whether or not the ready-to-win display occurs, the ready-to-win display is performed by the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, based on the information on the display duration time. It is possible to determine whether or not it occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur. Note that the variation command may directly include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.

The type command includes information related to the win/fail result. In other words, the type command includes each piece of information related to "big win win", "special loss result", and "normal loss result" as information related to win/fail results. Also, the type command includes information related to sorting results. In other words, the type command includes, as information related to the sorting result, each of the "low probability result", the "non-explicit few round high probability result", the "explicit few round high probability result", and the "best result". Contains information.
In the following description, the win/fail result and the sorting result are collectively referred to as the game result. In other words, the type command contains information about the game result.

In step S818, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display section 45 to start variable display based on the determination result. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the fluctuation start process.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first Since it indicates that the result display section 45a is to start the variable display, the first result display section 45a is caused to start the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, the second Since it indicates that the result display section 45b is to start the variable display, the second result display section 45b is caused to start the variable display.

Returning to the description of the game round control process, the game round progressing process of steps S606 to S609 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S602, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display unit 45 is performing variable display. Execute the process.

In step S606, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display continuation time set in step S816 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display continuation time counter of the RAM 64 has become "0" or less. The value of the display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S606 that the display continuation time has not passed, in step S607 it executes processing for variable display. In this process for variable display, the MPU 62 updates the display on the main display section 45 during variable display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S606 that the display continuation time has elapsed, in step S608, the MPU 62 executes fluctuation end processing. In this fluctuation end process, the MPU 62 stores the information (main (information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45). Then, at the end of the game cycle, the MPU 62 controls the display of the main display section 45 so that the main display section 45 displays the pattern corresponding to the specified information on the main display section 45 during the variable display.

Here, the pattern finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 differs for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm the game result by looking at the main display section 45 at the end of the game round. According to this, the manager of the game hall can easily check whether or not the pachinko machine 10 behaves in the same manner as in the case of winning a lottery to generate a big win. can be done systematically.
The display area of the main display section 45 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game cycle, the player checks the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45 to determine whether or not the player has won the big win. Attention to the screen G can be increased.

In step S609, the MPU 62 sets a fluctuation end command. The MPU 62 transmits the fluctuation end command set in step S609 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for ending the effect of the game round based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Here, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the effect of the game round without requiring reception of the variation end command.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S914 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S902 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S911.

First, the processing (processing after step S902) when it is determined in step S901 that the MPU 62 is not in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display on the main display section 45 has ended. When the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the variable display on the main display section 45 has not ended, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the variable display of the main display section 45 has ended, it determines in step S903 whether the success/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. determine whether Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is "big win winning" or "special losing result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets an opening/closing execution mode flag in the RAM 64, and then executes the processing from step S904.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the win/fail result does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (if it determines that the win/fail result is the "normal deviation result"), the game Terminate state transition processing.

In step S904, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special losing result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the win/loss result is the "special loss result", the MPU 62 sets "2" to the open/close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S905. This open/close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times the MPU 62 opens and closes the big winning opening 38a of the variable winning device 38 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", i.e., if it determines that the win/loss result is "jackpot winning", in step S906, the distribution result is a small-round high-probability result ("implicit small-round high-probability result" or "explicit small-round high-probability result").

When the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the result of allocation is a small round high probability result, in step S907 the MPU 62 sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "2". In addition, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the distribution result is not the high-probability result for a small number of rounds, that is, when it determines that the distribution result is the "low-probability result" or the "best result", step In S908, a round number setting process is executed. In this round number setting process, the MPU 62 sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "4" or "16". This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a process for setting the number of rounds.
In the round number setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1012 as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the MPU 62 clears the round game execution flags (the 4th round execution flag and the 16th round execution flag) stored in the RAM64.
In step S1002, the MPU 62 determines whether the non-electric accessory 51 is open by determining whether the non-electric accessory open detection sensor 519 has detected the opening of the non-electric accessory 51. do.

When the MPU 62 determines that the non-electric accessory 51 is not open in step S1002, in step S1003, it sets a non-open command. The MPU 62 transmits the non-open command set in step S1003 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 of normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the non-open command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the non-electric accessory 51 is being opened in step S1002, in step S1004, it sets an opening command. The MPU 62 transmits the open command set in step S1004 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 of normal processing.
It should be noted that the sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S1003 or step S1004, the MPU 62 executes a crew route setting process in step S1005. In this crew route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the crew route by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 523c.

In step S1006, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the round game execution flag (4 round execution flag or 16 round execution flag) is set in the RAM64. In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball enters the round game execution gate (4 round execution gate or 16 round execution gate) after executing the crew root setting process.

MPU62 performs step S1006 again, when it determines with the round game execution flag not being set to RAM64 in step S1006.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the round game execution flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1006, it determines whether or not the 4 round execution flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1007. .

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that the 4-round execution flag is set in the RAM 64, it sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "4" in step S1008.
In step S1009, the MPU 62 sets a 4-round execution command. The MPU 62 transmits the 4-round execution command set in step S1009 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the 4-round execution command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that the 4-round execution flag is not set in the RAM 64 (when it determines that the 16-round execution flag is set in the RAM 64), in step S1010 , the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 is set to "16".
In step S1011, the MPU 62 sets a 16-round execution command. The MPU 62 transmits the 16-round execution command set in step S1011 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 of normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the 16-round execution command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S1009 or step S1011, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route by executing drive control of the plate driving section 523c. After that, the MPU 62 ends the round number setting process.

In this way, after setting the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the crew root, the MPU 62 sets the right variable ball entry based on the game ball entering the round game execution gate (4 round execution gate or 16 round execution gate). Since the mechanism 52 is set to the ejection route, the crew 53 may enter a plurality of game balls depending on the timing of setting the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route. In this case, the MPU 62 sets the number of round games based on the round game execution gate into which one of the game balls first enters, so that the player's game can improve the attention of
In addition, in this embodiment, the crew 53 is configured so that a plurality of game balls may enter, but may be configured so as not to cause a plurality of game balls to enter.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of opening/closing execution modes with mutually different end conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has, as opening/closing execution modes, a number-of-rounds stipulation mode that shifts to when the win/fail result is a "jackpot win", and an opening/closing number mode to shift to when the win/fail result is a "special losing result". and a prescribed mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening/closing number regulation mode ends under the condition that the large winning opening 38a has been opened and closed a predetermined total number of times, or that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the large winning opening 38a. Here, the total number of openings and closings of the big winning opening 38a corresponds to the value set in the opening/closing counter SOC. This opening/closing number regulation mode does not end under the condition of the number of executions of the round game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a once per round game. Also, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again by satisfying one of the following two conditions.
(1) A predetermined upper limit duration time (upper limit duration) elapses (2) The total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit number

Returning to the description of the game state transition processing, the processing after step S909 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing any of the processes of steps S905, S907, and S908, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 as waiting time (waiting period) for opening in step S909. Set "1000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. The waiting time for opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In this way, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the win/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the waiting time for opening to the timer counter T regardless of the type of the game result. set. In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be subtly different according to the type of game result to such an extent that the player recognizes the same. In addition, for example, the waiting time for the opening is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

At step S910, the MPU 62 sets an opening command. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, the opening command includes information regarding the number of round games when the game result is the "low probability result" or the "best result". The MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S910 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the processing (processing after step S911) when it is determined in step S901 that the MPU 62 is in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S911, the MPU 62 executes a big winning opening opening/closing process.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process.
In the big winning opening opening/closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1124 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the big winning opening 38a is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the big winning opening 38a is not open, it executes the processing from step S1102.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the big winning opening 38a is open, it executes the processing from step S1106.

First, in step S1101, the processing (processing after step S1102) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 38a is not open will be described.
In step S1102, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1102 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1102 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, in step S1103, the timer counter T Determines whether the value is less than or equal to "0".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1103 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1103 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", in step S1104, it executes a special winning opening opening process.
The special winning opening opening process of step S1104 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process.
In the big winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1201 to S1207 as shown in FIG.
In step S1201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", in step S1202, the MPU 62 sets "8" to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, and At S1203, the timer counter T is set to "85". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result", in step S1204, it sets "8" to the winning counter PC, and in step S1205, the distribution result is a small-round high-probability result ("implicit small-round high-probability result" or "explicit small-round high-probability result").

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the result of allocation is the small round high probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1203.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the allocation result is not the small round high probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "15000" in step S1206. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

After executing the process of step S1203 or step S1206, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the big winning opening 38a in step S1207. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC at step S1202 or step S1204 defines the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a.
Also, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1203 or step S1206 defines the upper limit duration time from when the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state to when it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit duration time with different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000", as described above. Specifically, the MPU 62 has a long-time mode (long-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec, and a short-time mode (short-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode. aspect).

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. In addition, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the big winning opening 38a to eight by setting the winning counter PC to "8".
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the firing period of the game balls, so the upper limit of 8 game balls is easy to win in the big prize opening 38a.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the shooting cycle of the game balls. (shorter than the period), it is difficult to let the game ball enter the big winning hole 38a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to win about one game ball into the big winning hole 38a.

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process, the processes after step S1105 will be explained with reference to FIG.
The MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S1105 after executing the big winning opening opening process in step S1104. In addition, the MPU 62 transmits the open command set in step S1105 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and executes predetermined processing.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1106) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 38a is being opened in step S1101 will be described.
In step S1106, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit continuation time set in the timer counter T in step S1203 or step S1206 of the big winning opening opening process has elapsed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1107.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1118.

First, processing (processing after step S1107) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" will be described.
In step S1107, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the special prize opening 38a. It should be noted that determination of whether or not a prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 38a is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the large winning opening 38a.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1107 that no prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 38a, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1107 that a prize has been awarded to the big prize opening 38a, in step S1108, the value of the prize counter PC is updated by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S1109, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1109 that the value of the winning counter PC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1109 that the value of the winning counter PC is equal to or less than "0", in step S1110 the closing execution process is executed. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c.

In step S1111, the MPU 62 sets a closing command. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S1111 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 of normal processing.
Based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state, and executes predetermined processing.

In step S1112, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1112 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1123, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1112 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", it executes the processing from step S1113.
In step S1113, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S1114, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1114 that the value of the round counter RC is not less than "0", it sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S1115. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1115 is set to the open standby state from when the open/close door 38b is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again until the open/close door 38b is set to the open state again. stipulates the time. In addition, in this embodiment, the release waiting time is 1 sec. This opening standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1114 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1116.
In step S1116, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as a waiting time (waiting period) for ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 seconds. Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of game result, like the waiting time for the opening. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be slightly different according to the type of game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. In addition, for example, the waiting time for the ending is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

At step S1117, the MPU 62 sets an ending command. This ending command includes information as to whether or not the non-electric accessory 51 is open. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether the non-electric accessory 51 is being opened by determining whether the non-electric accessory open detection sensor 519 has detected the opening of the non-electric accessory 51. and include this information in the ending command. The MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S1117 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1118) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less will be described.
In step S1118, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing in the same manner as in step S1110 described above.
In step S1119, the MPU 62 sets a closing command as in step S1111 described above.

In step S1120, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special losing result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1120 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", that is, if it determines that the win/loss result is the "big win", it executes the processing from step S1121 onwards.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1120 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", it executes the processing from step S1123.

First, the process (process after step S1121) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result" in step S1120 will be described.
In step S1121, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S1122, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1122 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after step S1115 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1122 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after S1116 described above.

Next, the process (process after step S1123) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result" in step S1112 or step S1120 will be described.
In step S1123, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the open/close counter SOC to update it.

In step S1124, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1124 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1115 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1124 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes from S1116 onward.

Returning to the description of the game state transition processing, the processing after step S912 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S911, the MPU 62 checks whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less in step S912. judge.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that both the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are less than or equal to "0", in step S913 the value of the timer counter T is set to " 0” or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S913 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S913 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, in step S914, after clearing the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64, Execute transition processing at the end of open/close execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process.
The transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described in detail below.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1301 to S1312 as shown in FIG.
In step S1301, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the sorting result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit few rounds high probability result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1301 that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result", it executes the processing from step S1302 onwards.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1301 that the sorting result is not the "highest advantage result" or the "high probability result of explicit few rounds", it executes the processing from step S1305 onward.

First, in step S1301, the processing (processing after step S1302) when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is the "most favorable result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" will be described.
In step S1302, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

At step S1303, the MPU 62 clears the count limit flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG.
Here, the high-frequency support mode is continued at least until "big win" is won in the winning lottery when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number of times limit flag is not set.

At step S1304, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag to the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high-probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64 . As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

When ending the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the flags (low probability result flag, non-explicit small round high probability result flag, explicit small round high probability clear the most favorable result flag) and the special outlier flag. Further, in step S801 of the fluctuation start process described above, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64, thereby determining whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. there is

Next, the processing (processing after step S1305) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1301 that the sorting result is not the "most favorable result" or the "high probability result of explicit few rounds" will be described.
In step S1305, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "non-explicit small round high probability result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1305 that the allocation result is the "non-explicit small round high probability result", the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1306.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1305 that the allocation result is not the "non-explicit small round high probability result", it executes the processing from step S1308.

First, the processing (processing after step S1306) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1305 that the allocation result is the "non-explicit small round high probability result" will be described.
In step S1306, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1306 that the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, it executes the processes after step S1303 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1306 that the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 64, it sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64 in step S1307. The MPU 62 maintains the high-probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64 . As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1308) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the allocation result is not the “non-explicit small round high probability result” in step S1305 will be described.
In step S1308, the MPU 62 determines whether the sorting result is a "low probability result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1308 that the sorting result is not the "low-probability result" (when it determines that the win-or-fail result is the "special failure result"), it ends the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. do.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1308 that the sorting result is the "low-probability result", it executes the processing after step S1309.

In step S1309, the MPU 62 clears the high probability mode flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is obtained in the winning lottery and the distribution result is other than a "low-probability result".

At step S1310, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1311, the MPU 62 sets "100" to the value of the number-of-games counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. FIG.
At step S1312, the MPU 62 sets a count limit flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the number limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64 . After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end reference number of times set in the game number counter, are played. Continue until times are digested. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 games have been played. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
Note that the MPU 62 executes these processes as electrical support processes in step S406 of the normal process, but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, if the winning lottery results in a "jackpot winning" and the distribution result in the distribution lottery becomes a "most advantageous result" or a "high probability result", the game state is the current state. Regardless of the game state, after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the game shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

Also, when the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode, if the win-or-loss lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is "unexplained small round high probability result", After the opening/closing execution mode (that is, round number regulation mode) ends, the game state shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

On the other hand, when the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the win-or-loss lottery results in a "jackpot win", and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is the "non-explicit small round high probability result". Then, the game state shifts to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends. The high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode continue at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

In addition, if the winning lottery results in a "big win" and the distribution result in the distribution lottery results in a "low probability result", the game state is the opening and closing execution mode (that is, After the end of the round number regulation mode), it shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues at least until a "jackpot win" is achieved in the lottery, and the high-frequency support mode continues until the "jackpot win" is achieved in the lottery. Transition to frequency support mode.

Further, when the winning lottery does not result in a "big hit", that is, when the winning result in the winning lottery is a "special losing result" or a "normal losing result", the game state does not shift.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game state transition processing is such that after the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, opening/closing is performed when the game ball is entered into any one of the non-electric accessory 51 and the holes 533A to 533C. It functions as specific control starting means for starting a game in the run mode.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emission Control Device 90 and Display Control Device 100>
FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 28, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 that constitute the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as the ROM 93 and the RAM 94, are integrated into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, the speaker unit 24, and the display control device 100. FIG.
The MPU 92 executes driving control of various lamp units 23 , 49 a to 49 c and the speaker unit 24 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 .
Also, the MPU 92 transmits commands resulting from analysis of these commands to the display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101 , an MPU 102 , a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 that constitute the MPU 102 , a video display processor (VDP) 105 , a character ROM 106 and a video RAM 107 . Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which, in addition to the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip. MPU 102 , VDP 105 , character ROM 106 and video RAM 107 are mounted on display control board 101 .

The MPU 102 analyzes the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 and performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on this command to control the VDP 105 . Specifically, MPU 102 controls VDP 105 by generating commands for VDP 105 .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside for holding stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 103. The work RAM 104 is a volatile memory that requires power supply from the outside to hold the stored information. It is a memory means.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 47 . Since the VDP 105 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102 and stores the image data in the video RAM 107 .

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 47 . The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 47 , and the display contents of the pattern display device 47 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107 .

<Regarding Timer Interrupt Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 90>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes timer interrupt processing for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1401 to S1405 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) as shown in FIG.

In step S1401, the MPU 92 executes command storage processing. In this command storage process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62 , it stores the command in the RAM 94 . Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 62 , and the MPU 92 stores the commands in the ring buffer according to the order received from the MPU 62 . The MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they are stored in the ring buffer.

In step S1402, the MPU 92 executes effect determination processing based on the command received from the MPU 62. FIG. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines the effect for the game cycle, the effect for the open/close execution mode, and the like.
In step S1403, the MPU 92 executes an effect execution process based on the contents of the effect determination process in step S1402. Specifically, in the effect execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and 49a to 49c, and executes sound control of the speaker unit 24. FIG.

In step S<b>1404 , the MPU 92 executes demonstration display execution processing based on the demonstration command received from the MPU 62 . In the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demonstration display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 sec) for the start of the demonstration elapses without a new game cycle being started after the game cycle ends. . Specifically, in the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 .

In step S1405, command transmission processing for transmitting the command set in the effect determination processing in step S1402 to the display control device 100 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 92 determines whether it is time to transmit various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 to the display control device 100 , and transmits various commands to the display control device 100 . , the command is transmitted to the display control device 100 . After that, the MPU 92 terminates the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the open/close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1501 to S1518 as shown in FIG.

In step S1501, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 have been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1501 that each command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S1509 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1501 that each command has been received, in step S1502, based on the content of the type command, the game result is "best result" or "low probability". result”.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1502 that the game result is the "best result" or "low probability result", in step S1503, it executes symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of game result. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", the MPU 92 finally stops and displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result to be displayed on the activated line L. When information relating to a combination of symbols having numbers is determined and the game result is determined to be a "low-probability result", the same even-numbered number is displayed as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Information relating to the combination of symbols possessed is determined. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1502 that the game result is not the "best result" or "low probability result", in step S1504, based on the content of the type command, the game result is " It is determined whether or not the result is “out of normal result”.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1504 that the game result is not the "normal result", that is, the game result is "special result", "non-explicit small round high probability result", and "explicit small round high probability result". If it is either, in step S1505, common symbol determination processing is executed. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information relating to a combination of special symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a special combination of symbols having different numbers (for example, "3-4-1"). It should be noted that this special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1504 that the game result is the "normal failure result", in step S1506, the MPU 92 executes symbol determination processing for normal failure. In this normal out-of-symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display will occur, the MPU 92 determines information relating to the combination of the symbols for the ready-to-win display as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. FIG. It should be noted that the combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display is randomly determined by a lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display does not occur, the MPU 92 provides information relating to a combination of symbols different from the above-described combination of symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols different from any of the combination of symbols having the same number, the special combination of symbols, and the combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display by lottery or the like.

After executing any one of steps S1503, S1505, and S1506, the MPU 92 executes a production pattern determination process in step S1507. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 . Specifically, the MPU 92 selects an effect continuation time (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S1507, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate an advance notice display.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S1403 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S1508, the MPU 92 sets a change start command and a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any one of steps S1503, S1505 and S1506. Then, the MPU 92 stores the variation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. FIG. These fluctuation start command and stop result command are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S1405 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 retrieves from the program ROM 103 a data table for starting the variable display and displaying the stop result on the pattern display device 47 based on the variable start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92 . read out. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the effective line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the process of step S1508, or when determining in step S1501 that the variation command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S1509 and subsequent steps.
In step S1509, the MPU 92 executes round number determination processing.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the round number determination process.
In the round number determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1601 to S1612 as shown in FIG.
In step S1601, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the non-release command transmitted from the MPU 62 has been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that it has received the command when not open, it executes determination processing of the effect when not open in step S1602. In this non-open effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the content of the effect corresponding to the non-open command by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 .

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S1403 based on the content of the selected effect.

In step S1603, the MPU 92 sets a non-open effect command related to the non-open effect determined in the non-open effect determination process of step S1602. Then, the MPU 92 stores the command for non-open effect in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 . This non-open effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the above-described command transmission processing of step S1405.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the non-open effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the non-open effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the non-open effect.

After executing the process of step S1603, or if it is determined in step S1601 that the non-open command has not been received, the MPU 92 checks in step S1604 whether the open command transmitted from the MPU 62 has been received. determine whether or not
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1604 that the opening command has been received, in step S1605, the opening effect determination process is executed. In this opening effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening command by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 .

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S1403 based on the content of the selected effect.

In step S1606, the MPU 92 sets an opening effect command related to the opening effect determined in the opening effect determination process of step S1605. Then, the MPU 92 stores the opening effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 . This opening effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S1405 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the opening effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the opening effect.

After executing the processing of step S1606, or when it is determined that the command at the time of opening has not been received in step S1604, in step S1607, whether the 4-round execution command transmitted from the MPU 62 has been received. determine whether or not
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1607 that the 4 round execution command has been received, in step S1608, the MPU 92 executes 4 round execution effect determination processing. In this 4-round execution effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the contents of the effect corresponding to the 4-round execution command by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 .

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S1403 based on the content of the selected effect.

In step S1609, the MPU 92 sets a command for 4 rounds execution effect related to the 4 rounds execution effect determined in the 4 rounds execution effect determination process of step S1608. Then, the MPU 92 stores the 4-round execution effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. FIG. This 4-round execution rendering command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S1405 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the 4 rounds execution effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the 4 rounds execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes a 4-round execution effect.

After executing the process of step S1609, or when it is determined in step S1607 that the 4-round execution command has not been received, the MPU 92 receives the 16-round execution command transmitted from the MPU 62 in step S1610. determine whether or not there is
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1610 that the 16-round execution command has been received, in step S1611, the MPU 92 executes 16-round execution effect determination processing. In this 16-round execution effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the contents of the effect corresponding to the 16-round execution command by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 .

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S1403 based on the content of the selected effect.

In step S1612, the MPU 92 sets a command for 16 rounds execution effect related to the 16 rounds execution effect determined in the 16 rounds execution effect determination process of step S1611. Then, the MPU 92 stores the 16-round execution rendering command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 . This 16-round execution rendering command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S1405 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the 16-round execution effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the command for the 16-round execution effect transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the 16-round execution effect.

After executing the process of step S1612, or when determining that the 16-round execution command has not been received in step S1610, the MPU 92 ends the round number determination process.

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the processes after step S1510 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S1510, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S1514.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that it has received an opening command, in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the contents of the opening command.

In step S1512, the MPU 92 executes determination processing of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S1511. In the processing for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1511 that the game result is the "special loss result" or the "non-explicit small round high probability result", the opening/closing execution mode effect is determined. Effect A is selected as the effect. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “explicit small round high probability result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result" and determines that the number of times of the round game is 4, the MPU 92 selects the effect C1 or the effect D1 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. do. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result" and determines that the number of times of the round game is 16, the MPU 92 selects the effect C2 or the effect D2 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. do. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result" and determines that the number of times of the round game is four, it selects the effect D1 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result" and determines that the number of round games is 16, it selects the effect D2 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

The duration of the effects A and B corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short period of time in the open/close execution mode. Also, the duration of the effect C1 and the effect D1 corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed four times in the long time mode in the open/close execution mode. Further, the duration of the effect C2 and the effect D2 corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 16 times in the long time mode in the open/close execution mode.
In the following description, effects C1 and C2 are also simply referred to as effects C, and effects D1 and D2 are also simply referred to as effects D.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S1403 based on the selection result of the effects A to D.

In step S1513, the MPU 92 sets an opening/closing execution mode command including information relating to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S1512. Then, the MPU 92 stores the open/close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 . This opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S1405 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 47 executes an effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

After executing the process of step S1513, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S1510, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S1514 and subsequent steps.
In step S1514, the MPU 92 determines whether an ending command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S1518.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1514 that the ending command has been received, in step S1515, the MPU 92 executes a non-electric accessory open determination process. In this non-electric accessory opening determination process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the non-electric accessory 51 is being opened based on the content of the ending command.

In step S1516, the MPU 92 executes the ending effect determination process corresponding to the state of the non-electric accessory 51 determined in step S1515. In the ending effect determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the non-electric accessory 51 is not open in step S1515 (when it determines that it is closed), the non-electric accessory 51 is opened as the ending effect. is selected to select a normal effect that does not notify the player. On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the non-electric accessory 51 is being opened in step S1515, the MPU 92 selects an opening notification effect for notifying the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 as the ending effect. do.

In step S1517, the MPU 92 sets an ending effect command related to the ending effect (normal effect or opening notification effect) determined in the ending effect determination process of step S1516. Then, the MPU 92 stores the ending effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. FIG. This ending effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S1405 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the ending effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 47 executes the ending effect.

After executing the processing of step S1517, or when determining that the ending command has not been received in step S1514, the MPU 92 executes other processing in step S1518. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes processes for advancing the effects for the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command and the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, for example. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the effect determination process.

<Regarding the relationship between game results and game status>
The relationship between game results and game states based on the execution of various processes will be described below.
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states. Specifically, FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the "normal failure result" and the game states, etc., in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states, etc. are arranged in the row direction.
The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. It has distribution results of "few rounds high probability result", "best result", and "low probability result".

As shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 32, the "special loss result" is the game result selected when the "big win" is not won in the win/loss lottery (symbol x in the figure). Also, the sorting result is the game result selected when "big hit" is won in the winning lottery (symbol ◯ in the figure).
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game results other than the "normal result" and the game state will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows. The contents of the game state and the like are arbitrary.

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. Also, in the "special losing result", the lottery mode does not shift.
In the "unspecified small round high probability result", the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with two times as the upper limit, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. be done. In addition, in the "non-explicit small round high probability result", the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode.
In this way, the "special loss result" and the "non-explicit small round high probability result" differ in the types of opening and closing execution modes, but they are common in that the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. is doing.

In addition, in the "special failure result" and "non-explicit small round high probability result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. In addition, "special outlier results" and "implicit few-round high-probability results" do not transition to support mode. In addition, the symbol display device 47 does not display, on the display screen G, an image indicating that the high-probability mode is set in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Therefore, the player cannot grasp whether the game result is the "special failure result" or the "non-explicit small round high probability result" by checking the stop result or the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Can not. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in the "non-explicit small round high probability result" and shifts to the high probability mode, the symbol display device 47 does not perform the winning lottery in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Disguise as if the mode has not changed.
Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction of whether or not the winning lottery mode has shifted to the high-probability mode.

In the "explicit small round high probability result", the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with two times as the upper limit number, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. be. In addition, in the "explicit small round high probability result", the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In addition, in the "clearly limited round high probability result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect B. In addition, in the "explicit small number of rounds high probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the game cycle after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays an image on the display screen G clearly indicating the high probability mode.
Therefore, the player can understand that the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result" by confirming the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result" and "low probability result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of 4 times or 16 times, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is continued for a long time. Aspects are run 4 or 16 times.
Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the open/close execution mode is the effect C or the effect D. Specifically, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect C, and the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number. If so, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect D.
In addition, in the "low-probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the win-or-fail lottery mode shifts to the low-probability mode. Become. Additionally, for "Most Favorable Outcome" and "Less Probable Outcome", the support mode transitions to a high frequency support mode.

Therefore, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect C, the game result is the "best result". can be grasped. However, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the player confirms the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, so that the game result is the "best result". and "low-probability results" cannot be grasped.

Then, in the game cycle after the opening/closing execution mode ends, if the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is finally the effect D, the pattern display device 47 displays an image clearly indicating the high probability mode on the display screen G. do not do.

Specifically, the symbol display device 47 does not display on the display screen G an image that clearly indicates that the high probability mode is selected, and the high frequency support mode is set such that the number of game rounds is the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) is reached, an image is displayed on the display screen G to notify that the mode will be shifted to the low-frequency support mode. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in the "most advantageous result", the pattern display device 47 will cause the opening/closing execution mode effect to be the final effect D in the game cycle after the opening/closing execution mode ends. If so, the game result is camouflaged as if it were a "low-probability result".

Then, when the sorting result is the "most advantageous result", the pattern display device 47 does not become a "jackpot winning" in the winning lottery, and is in the high probability mode after 100 game rounds are completed. An image clearly indicating that is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, the symbol display device 47 cancels the camouflage that has been applied as if the game result was a "low-probability result".

<About the flow when switching to open/close execution mode>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right variable entry mechanism when the opening/closing execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory is not opened. In addition, FIG. 33 shows a simplified non-electric accessory 51 at the bottom left of the display screen G. As shown in FIG.
Specifically, FIG. 33A is a diagram showing the display screen G when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. FIGS. 33B and 33C are diagrams showing the display screen G when a ball enters the 4th round execution gate. 33(D) and (E) are diagrams showing the display screen G when a ball enters the 16-round execution gate. FIG. 33(F) is a diagram showing a display screen G when an opening notification effect for informing the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is selected as an ending effect.

When the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. It is placed at the lower left position of G, and the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped.
Here, if the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the non-opening command has been received. Effect determination processing is executed, and in step S1603, a non-open effect command related to the non-open effect determined in the non-open effect determination process of step S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-open effect based on the non-open effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 prompts the player to hit to the right by displaying the angel's words "Aim for the right-handed Kroon!" Suggest.

Moreover, MPU62 performs the setting process of a crew route in step S1005. In this process of setting the crew root, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the crew root by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 sec, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving section 521c, the game ball is set to the inclination of the blade member 521a. is used to enter the right variable ball entering mechanism 52 along the blade member 521a. In addition, by setting the plate 523a to the closed state, when it is set to the crew root, after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided by the guide rail 525 be guided to After that, the game ball is guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525. - 特許庁
After that, the game ball guided to the croon 53 through the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.

When the ball enters the holes 533B and 533C (4th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1607 that the 4th round execution command has been received. is executed, and in step S1609, a 4 round execution effect command related to the 4 round execution effect determined in the 4 round execution effect determination process of step S1608 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 4 rounds execution effect based on the command for the 4 rounds execution effect transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33(B), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line "4R confirmed! Hit right!" The player is notified to start playing four rounds of games.

Also, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

After that, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that it has received an opening command, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A determination process of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 33, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. , the game result is determined to be the "best result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92 .

After ending the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, so in step S1515, the non-electric accessory opening determination process is executed. When a ball enters the holes 533B and 533C (fourth round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines that the non-electric accessory 51 is not open in step S1515. A normal performance is selected in which the opening of the is not notified to the player. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, in the example of FIG. 33, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 causes the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to be displayed as shown in FIG. 33(C). The player is notified of the shift to the high probability mode by displaying the angel's line "Probable change rush!"

On the other hand, if the ball enters the hole 533A (16 round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1610 that the 16 round execution command has been received. A round execution effect determination process is executed, and in step S1612, a command for 16 rounds execution effect related to the 16 rounds execution effect determined in the 16 rounds execution effect determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16 rounds execution effect based on the 16 rounds execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33(D), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line "16R confirmed! Hit right!" The player is notified to start playing 16 rounds of games. In addition, the game ball that enters the hole 533A of the croon 53, falls downward, and is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 535 shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. Let

Also, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

After that, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that it has received an opening command, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A determination process of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 33, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. , the game result is determined to be the "best result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, it selects the effect C2 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92 .

After ending the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, so in step S1515, the non-electric accessory opening determination process is executed. When the ball enters the hole 533A (16th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines that the non-electric accessory 51 is being opened in step S1515. An opening notification performance for notifying the player of the opening is selected. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, in the example of FIG. 33, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 causes the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to appear as shown in FIG. 33(E). The player is notified of the transition to the high-probability mode by displaying the words of an angel present in the game, ``Probable change rush!''. After that, as shown in FIG. 33(F), the MPU 102 displays the angel's words "The next big win is left-handed and 16R is fixed!" , to notify the player of the release of the non-electric accessory 51.例文帳に追加

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right variable entry mechanism when the open/close execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory is opened. In addition, FIG. 34 shows the non-electric accessory 51 in the lower left corner of the display screen G in a simplified manner.
Specifically, FIG. 34A is a diagram showing the display screen G when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. 34B and 34C are diagrams showing the display screen G when a ball is entered into the non-electric accessory 51. FIG.

When the opening/closing execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. , and stops the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.
Here, if the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is made when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1604 that the opening command has been received. Processing is executed, and in step S1606, a command for opening effect related to the opening effect determined in the opening effect determination processing of step S1605 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the opening effect based on the opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 suggests to the player to hit left by displaying the angel's line "Left hit 16R fixed!" .

Moreover, MPU62 performs the setting process of a crew route in step S1005. In this process of setting the crew root, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the crew root by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 sec, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving section 521c, the game ball is set to the inclination of the blade member 521a. is used to enter the right variable ball entering mechanism 52 along the blade member 521a. In addition, by setting the plate 523a to the closed state, when it is set to the crew root, after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided by the guide rail 525 be guided to After that, the game ball is guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525. - 特許庁
After that, the game ball guided to the croon 53 through the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.
Incidentally, when a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the pachinko machine 10 executes the same processing as when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened.

When the ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 (16 round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines that the 16 round execution command has been received in step S1610, so in step S1611, 16 rounds are executed. An effect determination process is executed, and in step S1612, a command for 16 rounds execution effect related to the 16 rounds execution effect determined in the 16 rounds execution effect determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16 rounds execution effect based on the 16 rounds execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34(B), the MPU 102 displays the line of the angel "16R confirmed! Hit right!" The player is notified to start playing 16 rounds of games. In addition, the game ball entering the non-electric accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the open state to the closed state.

Also, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

After that, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that it has received an opening command. A determination process of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 34, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. , the game result is determined to be the "best result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, it selects the effect C2 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92 .

After ending the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, so in step S1515, the non-electric accessory opening determination process is executed. When a ball enters the non-electrical accessory 51 (16th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines that the non-electrical accessory 51 is not open in step S1515. A normal performance is selected in which the opening of 51 is not notified to the player. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, in the example of FIG. 34, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. The player is notified of the shift to the high probability mode by displaying the angel's line "Probable change rush!"

Here, in this embodiment, the starting ball entry means includes the upper working port 36 (first starting ball entering portion) and the lower working port 37 (second starting ball entering portion).
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a left-handed route (first route) that makes it easy for game balls to enter the upper operating port 36 and makes it difficult for game balls to enter the lower operating port 37, and a lower route. It has a right-handed route (second route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the operating port 37 and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36.例文帳に追加The non-electric accessory 51 is arranged on the left-handed route.

In addition, the main controller 60 has a low frequency support mode (first game state) in which the probability of hitting the lower working port 37 is lower than the upper working port 36, and a lower working port 37 than the upper working port 36. It has a high-frequency support mode (second game state) in which the probability of hitting a ball is high, and functions as a game state switching means for switching between a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode.
Specifically, main controller 60 switches from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode after finishing the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Then, when the game result is ``explicit small round high probability result'' or ``most advantageous result'', the main controller 60 continues the high frequency support mode at least until ``winning big win'' in the lottery. . In addition, when the game result is a "low probability result", the main controller 60 executes the game round (internal lottery) for a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), and then switches from the high-frequency support mode. Switch to infrequent support mode.

Therefore, when the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result" or the "most advantageous result", the player, after finishing the game in the opening/closing execution mode, at least wins the "big win" in the lottery. A game turn can be executed by entering a game ball into the lower operation opening 37 through a right-handed route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electric accessory 51 at least until the "big win" is won in the winning lottery.

On the other hand, if the game result is a "low-probability result", after finishing the game in the open/close execution mode, until the game is executed 100 times (from the high-frequency support mode A game turn can be executed by entering a game ball into the lower operation opening 37 via a right-handed route (until switching to the low-frequency support mode). After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower operation port 37 via the right-handed route, the player can enter the game ball into the upper operation port 36 via the left-handed route to complete the game turn. can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric role 51 is arranged in the left-handed route, the player moves the non-electric role 51 from the closed state to the open state until the game is played 100 times. Furthermore, if the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state. A game can be played in anticipation of a transition.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode with no number limit and a high-frequency support mode with a number limit of 100 times, thereby providing an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player. However, by setting game states other than these, it is also possible to create advantageous game states and disadvantageous game states for the player. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player by varying the number of game rounds for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a game state advantageous to the player and a game state disadvantageous depending on whether or not to shift to the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by varying the number of game rounds in which the high-probability mode is continued after the end of the open/close execution mode. .

Here, if the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is made when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, the player causes the ball to enter each of the holes 533A to 533C of the croon 53, or enters the non-electric accessory 51. You can choose to spawn a sphere.
Therefore, for example, the player shifts to the opening and closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, and if the game result is "explicitly small round high probability result" or "best result", the rune 53 By aiming to enter the 16-round execution gate or the 4-round execution gate, it is possible to continue the high probability mode while maintaining the open state of the non-electric accessory 51 . After that, the player shifts to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, and when the game result is "low probability result", by aiming to enter the non-electric accessory 51, Since the non-electric role 51 can be shifted from the open state to the closed state, the player executes 100 game rounds after shifting the non-electric role 51 from the closed state to the open state. If the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode by then, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball is entered into the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

In this embodiment, the opening/closing ball entry means shifts from the open state to the closed state based on the entry of one game ball, but the open state is changed to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls. It may transition to a closed state.
When the opening/closing ball-entering means is configured in this way, for example, the player maintains the open state of the opening/closing ball-entering means even after entering the first game ball into the opening/closing ball-entering means. Therefore, the order of aiming at the round game execution gate can be diversified. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can further expand the player's options and further improve the player's attention to the game.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 allows game balls flowing down the game area to be entered based on the results of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of game balls into the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. Since the rune 53 is provided and the rune 53 is provided with holes 533A to 533C for starting the game in the opening and closing execution mode when the game ball is entered, the player can switch the game state to the opening and closing execution mode by the main controller 60. , the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started by entering game balls into the holes 533A to 533C. In addition, since the hole 533A shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, the player can shift the game state to the next opening/closing execution mode by the main controller 60. After that, by entering a game ball into the non-electric accessory 51, the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is faster than the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. Since a high value is given to the player, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening/closing execution mode by entering the game ball into the croon 53. . In addition, when the non-electric accessory 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball into the hole 533A, the player changes the game state by the main controller 60 to execute opening and closing next time. After shifting to the mode, by making the game ball enter the non-electric accessory 51, the player is given a higher value than the game in the opening/closing execution mode started when the game ball enters each hole 533B, 533C. It is possible to start a game in the open/close execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) The entry of a game ball into each of the holes 533B and 533C can start a game in an open/close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the non-electric accessory 51 and the game ball into the hole 533A. The ball entry is from the game in the opening and closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters each hole 533B, 533C by starting the game in the opening and closing execution mode that can put out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. Since a high value is awarded to the player, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

(4) The game state transition processing is an open/close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number when the game balls enter the holes 533B and 533C. When the game is started and the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 is set to a number greater than a predetermined number of times, thereby exceeding the predetermined number of game balls. Since the game of the opening/closing execution mode in which the game ball can be put out is started, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game of the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

(5) Since the holes 533A to 533C are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the croon 53, the player pays attention to where the game ball entering the croon 53 goes. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(6) The non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball with each plate-like body 513, and is in the closed state by receiving the game ball with each lower blade member 515. Since it shifts from the state to the open state, it is possible to shift the open state using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

(7) After finishing the game in the opening and closing execution mode, the player goes down through the right-handed route until 100 game rounds are executed (until the high-frequency support mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode). A game turn can be executed by entering a game ball into the operation opening 37 . After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower operation port 37 via the right-handed route, the player can enter the game ball into the upper operation port 36 via the left-handed route to complete the game turn. can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric role 51 is arranged in the left-handed route, the player moves the non-electric role 51 from the closed state to the open state until the game is played 100 times. Furthermore, if the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state. A game can be played in anticipation of a transition.

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 35 is a front view of a game board according to the second embodiment of the invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 is provided with the croon 53 provided in the area on the left side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, the ball enters the hole 533A of the croon 53, falls downward, and passes through the communication passage 535. The game ball guided to the non-electrical accessory 51 through the non-electrical accessory 51 shifts the non-electrical accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. In other words, in the first embodiment, the game ball entering the hole 533A of the croon 53 is always guided to the non-electric accessory 51 .
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game board 31 includes a croon 53A provided in the area on the left side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and the game ball entering the hole 533A of the croon 53A is not necessarily non-electrically driven. It differs from the first embodiment in that it is not guided by the accessory 51 .

FIG. 36 is an enlarged exploded perspective view of the vicinity of the croon, viewed obliquely from above.
The croon 53A, as shown in FIG. 36, has a disk-shaped rolling surface 531 for rolling the game ball guided to the croon 53A via the guide rail 525, and is provided along the periphery of the rolling surface 531. It comprises a side wall 532, a columnar rotating body 537 arranged below the rolling surface 531 and rotatable around the central axis, and a receiving plate 538 arranged below the rotating body 537. there is
In addition, the guide rail 525 guides the game ball to the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532 .

The rolling surface 531 has three holes 533A to 533C which are formed at predetermined distances from the center thereof and which are equally spaced from each other. and a projecting portion 534 having three side surfaces that slope downward toward the 533C side. Further, the rolling surface 531 is inclined downward from the side wall 532 toward the holes 533A to 533C (see FIG. 4).
Therefore, the game ball guided to the crew 53A through the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C (Fig. See middle arrow A).

The holes 533A-533C are provided with detection sensors 40i-40k (see FIG. 11) for detecting the entry of game balls, and the detection sensors 40i-40k are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. FIG. Specifically, the detection sensor 40i detects entry of a game ball into the hole 533A, the detection sensor 40j detects entry of a game ball into the hole 533B, and the detection sensor 40k detects entry of a game ball into the hole 533C. To detect the entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when balls enter the holes 533A to 533C, unlike when balls enter the various winning holes. Further, the detection sensors 40i to 40k may be of any kind as long as they can individually detect winning of game balls, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be employed.

Each of the holes 533A to 533C serves as an opportunity to start a round game when a transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the opening/closing execution mode is entered. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, when a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state, and execution of a predetermined number of round games is started.

Specifically, when a ball enters the hole 533A, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing the round game 16 times, so the hole 533A starts executing the round game 16 times. A mark is displayed around the hole 533A to suggest that.
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing the round game four times when a ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. not marked to suggest that

Thus, in this embodiment, the crew 53A, based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry ball of the game ball to the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37, the game ball flowing down the game area It functions as variable ball entry means that enables ball entry.
In addition, the croon 53A is provided with holes 533A to 533C (a plurality of ball entry portions) for entering gaming balls that have entered the croon 53A. This croon 53A has a rolling surface 531 for rolling the game ball that entered the croon 53A, and a plurality of entering ball parts are provided on the rolling surface 531, and a game that rolls on the rolling surface 531 Enter the ball. Specifically, the rolling surface 531 is formed at a predetermined distance from the center of the rolling surface 531 and has a plurality of ball entry portions provided at equal intervals.

In addition, in this embodiment, the plurality of ball-entering portions are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the croon 53A, and the game balls rolling on the rolling surface 531 are entered. On the other hand, the plurality of ball-entering units may be provided in, for example, a distribution mechanism that distributes a game ball that has entered the variable ball-entering means to one of the plurality of ball-entering units. In this case, the probabilities of allocating game balls to any of the plurality of ball-entering units in the allocating mechanism may be the same or different. In short, the variable ball-entering means only needs to have a plurality of ball-entering portions.
Also, in the present embodiment, the variable ball-entering means has a plurality of ball-entering portions, but the variable ball-entering means may have a single ball-entering portion.

Here, as described above, the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A (second ball entry portion) are 16-round execution gates that start execution of 16-round games. Further, each hole 533B, 533C (first ball entry part) is a 4-round execution gate for starting execution of 4-round games. Therefore, the game in the opening/closing execution mode started when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is higher than the game in the opening/closing execution mode started when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. It gives value to players.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times (four times in this embodiment) when the game ball enters each of the holes 533B and 533C. A game in the opening/closing execution mode in which game balls can be paid out is started, and when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, the number of times of opening and closing the variable prize winning device 38 is increased more than a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 16 times), a game in the opening/closing execution mode is started in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be put out.

In the present embodiment, the game in the opening/closing execution mode, which is started when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, is set by setting the number of times the variable winning device 38 opens and closes. A higher value is given to the player than the game in the open/close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the hole 533B, 533C. A higher value may be given to the player than the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the game ball. In short, the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entering means and the second ball entering portion is the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion. A value higher than the game should be given to the player.

Further, in this embodiment, the hole 533A is a 16-round execution gate for starting execution of 16 round games, each hole 533B, 533C is a 4-round execution gate for starting execution of 4 round games, and each hole The correspondence between 533A-533C and the 16-round and 4-round execution gates was fixed. On the other hand, the correspondence between the holes 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gates and 4-round execution gates does not have to be fixed. may According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the game playability, and can improve the attention of the player to the game.

Rotating body 537 has a circular upper surface and upper openings 537A1 to 537A3 formed at positions corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C, and a circular lower surface and upper opening 537A1. 537B1 to 537B3 communicating with 537B1 to 537A3.
The lower opening 537B1 opens so as to be concentric with the central axis of the rotating body 537. As shown in FIG. After rolling on the rolling surface 531, the game ball enters one of the holes 533A to 533C and falls downward, and enters the upper opening 537A1. It is discharged from the lower opening 537B1 through the passage 537C1 (see arrow B1 in the figure).

The lower opening 537B2 opens directly below the upper opening 537A2. After rolling on the rolling surface 531, the game ball enters one of the holes 533A to 533C and falls downward, and enters the upper opening 537A2. It is discharged from the lower opening 537B2 through the passage 537C2 (see arrow B2 in the figure).
The lower opening 537B3 opens directly below the upper opening 537A3. After rolling on the rolling surface 531, the game ball enters one of the holes 533A to 533C and falls downward, and enters the upper opening 537A3. It is discharged from the lower opening 537B3 through the passage 537C3 (see arrow B3 in the figure).

The receiving plate 538 has a disc-shaped rolling surface 538A on which the game balls discharged from the lower opening 537B2 or the lower opening 537B3 and dropped downward roll, and a side wall 538B provided along the periphery of the rolling surface 538A. I have.
The rolling surface 538A has a cylindrical portion 538A1 concentrically formed at its center. This tubular portion 538A1 guides the game ball discharged from the lower opening 537B1 to the communication passage 538C. This communication passage 538C guides the game ball to the non-electric accessory 51 in the same manner as the communication passage 535 in the first embodiment (see arrow C in the figure).
The side wall 538B has a laterally formed rectangular opening 538B1. This opening 538B1 guides the game ball discharged from the lower opening 537B2 or the lower opening 537B3 to the discharge passage 538D. This discharge passage 538D discharges the game ball to the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 35) in the same manner as the discharge passage 536 in the first embodiment.

Here, the rolling surface 538A is inclined downward toward the opening 538B1.
Therefore, the game ball discharged from the lower opening 537B2 or the lower opening 537B3 rolls on the rolling surface 538A and is guided to the discharge passage 538D through the opening 538B1 (see arrow D in the figure). .

Further, the rotating body 537 has a circular groove portion 537D formed on the lower surface thereof so as to be concentric with the central axis of the rotating body 537, and a gear (not shown) formed on the peripheral surface thereof. and a rotating body driving portion 537E (see FIG. 37) that rotates the rotating body 537 via this gear.
The groove portion 537</b>D fits the side wall 538</b>B of the tray 538 to place the rotating body 537 on the tray 538 and position the rotating body 537 with respect to the tray 538 .
The rotating body driving section 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotational speed via a gear formed on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 537. As shown in FIG.
In this embodiment, the rotating body driving section 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotational speed, but the rotating speed may be changed.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 37 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 37, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 for executing payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out game balls, and a power source/power source for executing shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. and a launch control device 80, which are mounted on the back pack unit.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. Note that the main controller 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may comprise marking means for marking upon its opening and may comprise marking structures for marking upon its opening. Specifically, as trace means, a circuit board box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting part (crimped part) that requires breaking of a predetermined part when separating each case body is provided, or a structure that peels off At this time, it is possible to adopt a structure in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off by the adhesive layer remaining on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Also, as the trace structure, it is possible to employ a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 that constitute the MPU 62 . Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 63 and RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip.
In this embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of other controllers other than the main controller 60 .

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a win/fail table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, and a reach table storage area 63c. These areas are described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 64 has various areas such as a various counter area 64a, a reserved ball storage area 64b, and an electrical work reservation area 64c. These areas are described in detail later.

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 65 provided in the main controller 60, a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40k, and a non-electric accessory open detection sensor 519. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. Further, the output ports of the MPU 62 include an electric accessory drive unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation port 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a blade member. A blade member driving portion 521c that opens and closes the plate 521a, a plate driving portion 523c that opens and closes the plate 523a, and a rotation that rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotational speed through a gear formed on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 537. It is connected to the body driving section 537E, the main display section 45, and the character object display section .

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory 37a. Further, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c to open and close the big winning opening 38a. Further, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the blade member driving section 521c to open and close the blade member 521a. In the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the plate driving section 523c to open/close the plate 523a. Further, the MPU 62 rotates the rotating body 537 by controlling the driving of the rotating body driving section 537E. Also, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winnings to the operation ports 36 and 37 . Further, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display section 46 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41 .

<About the flow when switching to open/close execution mode>
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right variable entry mechanism when the opening/closing execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory is not opened. Note that FIG. 38 shows a simplified non-electric accessory 51 at the lower left of the display screen G. As shown in FIG.
Specifically, FIG. 38A is a diagram showing the display screen G when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. FIGS. 38B and 38C are diagrams showing the non-electric accessory 51 which did not enter the open state after the ball entered the 4th round execution gate. FIGS. 38(D) and (E) are diagrams showing the non-electric accessory 51 in an open state after a ball has entered the 4th round execution gate. FIG. 38(F) is a diagram showing a display screen G when an opening notification effect for notifying the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is selected as an ending effect.

When the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. It is placed at the lower left position of G, and the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped.
Here, if the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the non-opening command has been received. Effect determination processing is executed, and in step S1603, a non-open effect command related to the non-open effect determined in the non-open effect determination process of step S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-open effect based on the non-open effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 prompts the player to hit to the right by displaying the angel's words "Aim for the right-handed Kroon!" Suggest.

Moreover, MPU62 performs the setting process of a crew route in step S1005. In this crew root setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the crew root by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 sec, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving section 521c, the game ball is set to the inclination of the blade member 521a. is used to enter the right variable ball entering mechanism 52 along the blade member 521a. In addition, by setting the plate 523a to the closed state, when it is set to the crew root, after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided by the guide rail 525 be guided to After that, the game ball is guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525. - 特許庁
After that, the game ball guided to the croon 53 through the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.

When the ball enters the holes 533B and 533C (4th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1607 that the 4th round execution command has been received. is executed, and in step S1609, a 4 round execution effect command related to the 4 round execution effect determined in the 4 round execution effect determination process of step S1608 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 4 rounds execution effect based on the command for the 4 rounds execution effect transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102, as shown in FIGS. 38(B) and 38(D), displays the angel's words "4R confirmed! Hit right!" is displayed, the player is notified that four rounds of games will be started.

Also, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

FIG. 39 is a perspective view showing a flow in which a game ball is guided to the discharge passage after the ball enters the 4-round execution gate.
When a ball enters the holes 533B and 533C (fourth round execution gate), the game ball passes through one of the rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotating body 537 and falls onto the tray 538. .
For example, when a ball enters the hole 533C, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops as shown in FIG. 39(A).

Here, since the rotating body drive section 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotational speed via a gear formed on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 537 (see arrow R in the figure), the hole 533C is It communicates with one of the rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotating body 537.
For example, when a ball enters the hole 533C, comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotor 537 and stops, and then communicates with the rotor passage 537C2, the game ball, as shown in FIG. After rolling on the rolling surface 538A of the tray 538, it is guided to the discharge passage 538D through the opening 538B1 (see the arrow in the drawing). This discharge passage 538D discharges the game ball to the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 35).

After that, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that it has received an opening command, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A determination process of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 38, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as a stop result. , the game result is determined to be the "best result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92 .

After ending the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, so in step S1515, the non-electric accessory opening determination process is executed. When the game ball is discharged to the game area through the discharge passage 538D, the MPU 92 determines that the non-electrical accessory 51 is not being opened in step S1515, so the opening of the non-electrical accessory 51 is played as the ending effect. Select a normal production that does not notify the person. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, in the example of FIG. 38, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 causes the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to appear as shown in FIG. 38(C). The player is notified of the shift to the high probability mode by displaying the angel's line "Probable change rush!"

FIG. 40 is a perspective view showing a flow in which the game ball is guided to the connecting passage after the ball enters the 4th round execution gate.
Further, for example, when a ball enters the hole 533C, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops as shown in FIG. 40(A).

Here, since the rotating body drive section 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotational speed via a gear formed on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 537 (see arrow R in the figure), the hole 533C is It communicates with one of the rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotating body 537.
For example, when a ball enters the hole 533C, comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotor 537 and stops, and then communicates with the rotor passage 537C1, the game ball, as shown in FIG. It will be guided to the connecting passage 538C via the tubular portion 538A1 (see the arrow in the figure). The communication passage 538C guides the game ball to the non-electric accessory 51. - 特許庁After that, the game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 538C shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state.

After that, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that it has received an opening command, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A determination process of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 38, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as a stop result. , the game result is determined to be the "best result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92 .

After ending the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, so in step S1515, the non-electric accessory opening determination process is executed. When the game ball is guided to the non-electrical accessory 51 in the communication passage 538C, the MPU 92 determines that the non-electrical accessory 51 is being opened in step S1515. selects an opening notification performance for informing the player of the opening of the Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, in the example of FIG. 38, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 causes the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to appear as shown in FIG. 38(E). The player is notified of the shift to the high probability mode by displaying the angel's line "Probable change rush!" After that, as shown in FIG. 38(F), the MPU 102 displays the angel's words "The next big win is left-handed, and 16R is fixed!" , to notify the player of the release of the non-electric accessory 51.例文帳に追加

Thus, in this embodiment, when a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops. Then, the game balls wait without entering the holes 533A to 533C until the holes 533A to 533C and the rotor passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotor 537 are communicated with each other. In other words, the game ball is not entered until the holes 533A to 533C and the rotor passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotor 537 are communicated with each other.

Here, if the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is made when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, the player causes the ball to enter each of the holes 533A to 533C of the croon 53, or enters the non-electric accessory 51. You can choose to spawn a sphere.
Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, for example, the player can first aim for the Krun 53 to enter the 16-round execution gate, resulting in 16 rounds. When the player is waiting for the ball to enter the 4th round execution gate instead of the execution gate, it is possible to further aim for the ball to enter the non-electric accessory 51.例文帳に追加Then, when it is possible to cause a ball to enter the non-electric accessory 51 while waiting for the ball to enter the 4th round execution gate of the crew 53, execution of the 16 round game can be started. . According to this, the player can switch which round game execution gate to aim at according to the situation, and the player's attention to the game can be improved.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right variable entry mechanism when the opening/closing execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory is not opened. In addition, FIG. 41 shows the non-electric accessory 51 in the lower left corner of the display screen G in a simplified manner.
Specifically, FIG. 41(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. FIGS. 41(B) and (C) are diagrams showing the non-electric accessory 51 which did not enter the open state after the ball entered the 16-round execution gate. 41(D) and (E) are diagrams showing the non-electric accessory 51 in an open state after a ball has entered the 16-round execution gate. FIG. 41(F) is a diagram showing a display screen G when an opening notification effect for notifying the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is selected as an ending effect.

When the opening/closing execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. It is placed at the lower left position of G, and the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped.
Here, if the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the non-opening command has been received. Effect determination processing is executed, and in step S1603, a non-open effect command related to the non-open effect determined in the non-open effect determination process of step S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-open effect based on the non-open effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 prompts the player to hit to the right by displaying the angel's words "Aim for the right-handed Kroon!" Suggest.

Moreover, MPU62 performs the setting process of a crew route in step S1005. In this process of setting the crew root, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the crew root by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 sec, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving section 521c, the game ball is set to the inclination of the blade member 521a. is used to enter the right variable ball entering mechanism 52 along the blade member 521a. In addition, by setting the plate 523a to the closed state, when it is set to the crew root, after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided by the guide rail 525 be guided to After that, the game ball is guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525. - 特許庁
After that, the game ball guided to the croon 53 through the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.

When the ball enters the hole 533A (16-round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1610 that the 16-round execution command has been received. Therefore, in step S1611, the 16-round execution effect is determined. The process is executed, and in step S1612, a command for 16 rounds execution effect related to the 16 rounds execution effect determined in the 16 rounds execution effect determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16 rounds execution effect based on the 16 rounds execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102, as shown in FIGS. 41(B) and 41(D), displays the angel's words "16R confirmed! Hit right!" is displayed, the player is informed that the execution of 16 round games will be started.

Also, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

FIG. 42 is a perspective view showing a flow in which a game ball is guided to the discharge passage after a ball enters the 16 round execution gate.
When a ball enters the hole 533A (16 round execution gate), the game ball passes through one of the rotor passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotor 537 and falls onto the tray 538.
When a ball enters the hole 533A, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotor 537 and stops, as shown in FIG. 42(A).

Here, since the rotating body drive section 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotational speed via a gear formed on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 537 (see arrow R in the figure), the hole 533C is It communicates with one of the rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotating body 537.
For example, when a ball enters the hole 533A, contacts the upper surface of the rotor 537 and stops, and then communicates with the rotor passage 537C2, the game ball, as shown in FIG. After rolling on the rolling surface 538A of the tray 538, it is guided to the discharge passage 538D through the opening 538B1 (see the arrow in the figure). This discharge passage 538D discharges the game ball to the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 35).

After that, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that it has received an opening command, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A determination process of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 41, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the activated line L as the stop result. , the game result is determined to be the "best result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, it selects the effect C2 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92 .

After ending the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, so in step S1515, the non-electric accessory opening determination process is executed. When the game ball is discharged to the game area through the discharge passage 538D, the MPU 92 determines that the non-electrical accessory 51 is not being opened in step S1515, so the opening of the non-electrical accessory 51 is played as the ending effect. Select a normal production that does not notify the person. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, in the example of FIG. 41, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 causes the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to appear as shown in FIG. 41(C). The player is notified of the shift to the high probability mode by displaying the angel's line "Probable change rush!"

FIG. 43 is a perspective view showing a flow in which a game ball is guided to a connecting passage after a ball enters the 16-round execution gate.
Also, when a ball enters the hole 533A, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops, as shown in FIG. 43(A).

Here, since the rotating body driving section 537E rotates the rotating body 537 at a predetermined rotational speed via a gear formed on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 537 (see arrow R in the drawing), the hole 533A is It communicates with one of the rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 of the rotating body 537.
For example, when a ball enters the hole 533A, contacts the upper surface of the rotating body 537 and stops, and then communicates with the rotating body passage 537C1, the game ball, as shown in FIG. It will be guided to the connecting passage 538C via the tubular portion 538A1 (see the arrow in the drawing). The communication passage 538C guides the game ball to the non-electric accessory 51. - 特許庁After that, the game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 538C shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state.

After that, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that it has received an opening command, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A determination process of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the present embodiment, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. The game result is judged to be the "best result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, it selects the effect C2 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92 .

After ending the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, so in step S1515, the non-electric accessory opening determination process is executed. When the game ball is guided to the non-electrical accessory 51 in the communication passage 538C, the MPU 92 determines that the non-electrical accessory 51 is being opened in step S1515. selects an opening notification performance for informing the player of the opening of the Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, in the example of FIG. 41, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 displays the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 as shown in FIG. 41(E). The player is notified of the shift to the high probability mode by displaying the angel's line "Probable change rush!" After that, as shown in FIG. 41(F), the MPU 102 displays the angel's words "The next jackpot hit is left-handed and 16R is fixed!" , to notify the player of the release of the non-electric accessory 51.例文帳に追加

As described above, in this embodiment, the rotating body 537 rotates around the axis passing through the center of the rolling surface 531, and allows game balls entering the holes 533A to 533C to enter. In addition, the rotating body 537 is formed at a position corresponding to each of the holes 533A to 533C, and has a plurality of rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 for guiding game balls entering the holes 533A to 533C. . The plurality of rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3 are a rotating body passage 537C2 and a rotating body passage 537C3 (first rotating body passage) that do not allow the non-electrical accessary 51 to shift from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. ), and a rotating body passage 537C1 (second rotating body passage) for shifting the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. Therefore, the rotating body 537 and the tray 538 function as opening/closing lottery means for executing a lottery for the non-electric accessory 51 based on the entry of game balls into the holes 533A to 533C.

In the present embodiment, the rotating body 537 and the tray 538 are used as opening/closing lottery means. A lottery using In addition, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing lottery means draws a lottery as to whether or not to shift the opening/closing ball entry means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry portion. A lottery may be made as to whether or not to shift the ball means from a disadvantageous state in which it is easy to close to an advantageous state in which it is easy to open. In short, the opening/closing lottery means may be any lottery as long as the lottery relating to the opening/closing ball entry means can be executed based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section.

Here, in this embodiment, the starting ball entry means includes the upper working port 36 (first starting ball entering portion) and the lower working port 37 (second starting ball entering portion).
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a left-handed route (first route) that makes it easy for game balls to enter the upper operating port 36 and makes it difficult for game balls to enter the lower operating port 37, and a lower route. It has a right-handed route (second route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the operating port 37 and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36.例文帳に追加The non-electric accessory 51 is arranged on the left-handed route.

In addition, the main controller 60 has a low frequency support mode (first game state) in which the probability of hitting the lower working port 37 is lower than the upper working port 36, and a lower working port 37 than the upper working port 36. It has a high-frequency support mode (second game state) in which the probability of hitting a ball is high, and functions as a game state switching means for switching between a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode.
Specifically, main controller 60 switches from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode after finishing the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Then, when the game result is ``explicit small round high probability result'' or ``most advantageous result'', the main controller 60 continues the high frequency support mode at least until ``winning big win'' in the lottery. . In addition, when the game result is a "low probability result", the main controller 60 executes the game round (internal lottery) for a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), and then switches from the high-frequency support mode. Switch to infrequent support mode.

Therefore, when the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result" or the "most advantageous result", the player, after finishing the game in the opening/closing execution mode, at least wins the "big win" in the lottery. A game turn can be executed by entering a game ball into the lower operation opening 37 through a right-handed route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electric accessory 51 at least until the "big win" is won in the winning lottery.

On the other hand, if the game result is a "low-probability result", after finishing the game in the open/close execution mode, until the game is executed 100 times (from the high-frequency support mode A game turn can be executed by entering a game ball into the lower operation opening 37 via a right-handed route (until switching to the low-frequency support mode). After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower operation port 37 via the right-handed route, the player can enter the game ball into the upper operation port 36 via the left-handed route to complete the game turn. can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric role 51 is arranged in the left-handed route, the player moves the non-electric role 51 from the closed state to the open state until the game is played 100 times. Furthermore, if the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state. A game can be played in anticipation of a transition.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode with no number limit and a high-frequency support mode with a number limit of 100 times, thereby providing an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player. However, by setting game states other than these, it is also possible to create advantageous game states and disadvantageous game states for the player. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player by varying the number of game rounds for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player depending on whether or not to shift to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by varying the number of game rounds in which the high-probability mode is continued after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 allows game balls flowing down the game area to be entered based on the results of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of game balls into the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. Since the cloon 53A is provided, and the cloon 53A is provided with holes 533A to 533C for starting the game in the open/close execution mode when the game ball is entered, the player can switch the game state to the open/close execution mode by the main controller 60. , the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started by entering game balls into the holes 533A to 533C. In addition, since the croon 53A is provided with a rotating body 537 and a tray 538 for executing a lottery for the non-electric accessory 51 based on the entry of game balls into the holes 533A to 533C, for example, the rotating body 537 and the tray 538 If the player wins the lottery executed in , and shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state, the player shifts the game state to the next opening/closing execution mode by the main control device 60. After that, by entering a game ball into the non-electric accessory 51, the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The game in the opening and closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is faster than the game in the opening and closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. Since a high value is given to the player, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening/closing execution mode by entering the game ball into the croon 53A. . Also, when the lottery executed by the rotating body 537 is won and the non-electric accessory 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state, the player changes the game state to the next game state by the main controller 60. After shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the player receives a higher value than the game in the opening/closing execution mode which starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51. It is possible to start the game of the opening and closing execution mode to be given to. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) The entry of game balls into the holes 533B and 533C can start a game in an open/close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the non-electric accessory 51 and the game balls into the hole 533A. The ball entry is from the game in the opening and closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters each hole 533B, 533C by starting the game in the opening and closing execution mode that can put out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. Since a high value is awarded to the player, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

(4) The game state transition processing is an open/close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number when the game balls enter the holes 533B and 533C. When the game is started and the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 is set to a number greater than a predetermined number of times, thereby exceeding the predetermined number of game balls. Since the game of the opening/closing execution mode in which the game ball can be put out is started, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game of the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

(5) Since the holes 533A to 533C are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the croon 53A, the player pays attention to the destination of the game ball entering the croon 53A. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(6) The opening/closing lottery means includes a rotating body 537 that rotates about an axis passing through the center of the rolling surface 531 and receives the game balls that enter the holes 533A to 533C. Rotary body passages 537C2 and 537C3 that do not shift the non-electrical accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, and the non-electrical accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. rotator passage 537C1 to be transferred. According to this, the opening/closing lottery means independently closes the non-electric accessory 51 without being affected by the cloon 53A having the holes 533A to 533C for starting the game in the opening/closing execution mode when the game ball enters. A lottery can be made as to whether or not to shift from the state to the open state. In addition, when the non-electric accessory 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state by causing the game ball that has entered each of the holes 533A to 533C to enter the rotating body passage 537C1 of the rotating body 537, the game After shifting the game state to the next opening/closing execution mode by the main control device 60, the person enters the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51, so that when the game ball enters each hole 533B, 533C It is possible to start a game in the opening/closing execution mode that gives the player a higher value than the game in the opening/closing execution mode to start. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(7) The non-electric accessory 51 shifts from an open state to a closed state by receiving a game ball with each plate-like body 513, and is in a closed state by receiving a game ball with each lower blade member 515. Since it shifts from the state to the open state, it is possible to shift the open state using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

(8) After finishing the game in the opening and closing execution mode, the player goes down through the right-handed route until 100 game rounds are executed (until the high-frequency support mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode). A game turn can be executed by entering a game ball into the operation opening 37 . After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower operation port 37 via the right-handed route, the player can enter the game ball into the upper operation port 36 via the left-handed route to complete the game turn. can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric role 51 is arranged in the left-handed route, the player moves the non-electric role 51 from the closed state to the open state until the game is played 100 times. Furthermore, if the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state. A game can be played in anticipation of a transition.

[Third embodiment]
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 44 is a front view of a game board according to the third embodiment of the invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 includes the croon 53 provided in the area on the left side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and the ball enters the hole 533A (16 round execution gate) of the croon 53 and falls downward. Then, the game ball guided to the non-electrical accessory 51 through the communication passage 535 shifts the non-electrical accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. In other words, in the first embodiment, the game ball entering the 16th round execution gate was always guided to the non-electric accessory 51 .
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game board 31 includes a cloon 53B provided in the area on the left side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and the game ball entering the 16-round execution gate of the cloon 53B is not necessarily It differs from the first embodiment in that it is not guided by the non-electric accessory 51 .

FIG. 45 is an enlarged exploded perspective view of the vicinity of the croon, viewed obliquely from above.
The clown 53B includes a first clown 55 connected to the guide rail 525 and a second clown 56 arranged below the first clown 55, as shown in FIG.
The first rune 55 includes a disk-shaped rolling surface 551 for rolling the game ball guided to the first rune 55 via the guide rail 525, and a side wall 552 provided along the periphery of the rolling surface 551. It has
In addition, the guide rail 525 guides the game ball to the rolling surface 551 along the side wall 552 .

The rolling surface 551 is formed with two holes 553A and 553B which are formed at a predetermined distance from the center thereof and which are equally spaced from each other. and a projecting portion 554 having two side surfaces that slope downward toward the 553B side. Also, the rolling surface 551 is inclined downward from the side wall 552 toward the holes 553A and 553B.
Therefore, the game ball guided to the first rune 55 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 551 along the side wall 552, and then enters one of the holes 553A and 553B. (See arrow A in the figure).

The holes 553A and 553B are provided with detection sensors 40i and 40j (see FIG. 114) for detecting entry of game balls. Specifically, the detection sensor 40i detects entry of a game ball into the hole 553A, and the detection sensor 40j detects entry of a game ball into the hole 553B. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when balls enter the holes 553A and 553B, unlike when balls enter the various winning holes. Further, the detection sensors 40i and 40j may be of any type as long as they can individually detect winning of game balls, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be employed.

Thus, in this embodiment, since the detection sensor 40i detects the entry of a game ball into the hole 553A, the hole 553A functions as a 16-round execution gate. Moreover, since the detection sensor 40j detects the entry of a game ball into the hole 553B, the hole 553B functions as a 4-round execution gate. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the detection sensor 40k is not used.

Each of the holes 553A and 553B serves as an opportunity to start the round game when a transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the opening/closing execution mode is entered. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening and closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after shifting to the opening and closing execution mode, when a ball enters the holes 553A and 553B, the opening and closing door 38b is set to an open state, and execution of a predetermined number of round games is started.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing 16 round games when a ball enters the hole 553A, and therefore starts executing 16 round games in the hole 553A. A mark is displayed around the hole 553A to suggest that.
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing four round games when a ball enters the hole 553B, suggesting that the hole 553B starts executing four round games. Not marked as to be.

In addition, the first cloon 55 includes a guide rail 555A that guides the game ball that has entered the hole 553A to the second cloon 56, and a guide rail 555B that guides the game ball that has entered the hole 553B to the second cloon 56. I have it.

Thus, in this embodiment, the first rune 55 is based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry ball of the game ball to the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37, the game flowing down the game area It functions as variable ball entry means that allows the ball to be entered.
In addition, the first clone 55 is provided with holes 553A and 553B (a plurality of ball entry portions) for entering game balls that have entered the first clone 55 . This first rune 55 has a rolling surface 551 for rolling the game ball that entered the first rune 55, and the plurality of entering ball parts are provided on the rolling surface 551, and the rolling surface 551 To enter a rolling game ball. Specifically, the rolling surface 551 is formed at a predetermined distance from the center of the rolling surface 551 and has a plurality of ball entry portions provided at equal intervals.

In addition, in this embodiment, the plurality of ball-entering portions are provided on the rolling surface 551 of the first crown 55 and enter the game balls rolling on the rolling surface 551 . On the other hand, the plurality of ball-entering units may be provided in, for example, a distribution mechanism that distributes a game ball that has entered the variable ball-entering means to one of the plurality of ball-entering units. In this case, the probabilities of allocating game balls to any of the plurality of ball-entering units in the allocating mechanism may be the same or different. In short, the variable ball-entering means only needs to have a plurality of ball-entering portions.
Also, in the present embodiment, the variable ball-entering means has a plurality of ball-entering portions, but the variable ball-entering means may have a single ball-entering portion.

Here, as described above, the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A (second ball entry portion) are the 16-round execution gate that starts the execution of the 16-round game. Also, the hole 553B (first ball entry portion) is a 4-round execution gate for starting the execution of 4-round games. Therefore, the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A has a higher value than the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the hole 553B. given to the person.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets the number of openings and closings of the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times (four times in this embodiment) when a game ball enters the hole 553B, so that a predetermined number of game balls are played. A game in the payout open/close execution mode is started, and when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A, the variable winning device 38 is opened/closed more times than a predetermined number (16 times in this embodiment). , a game in an opening/closing execution mode is started in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be put out.

In the present embodiment, the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A is a game to the hole 553B by setting the number of times the variable winning device 38 opens and closes. A higher value is given to the player than the game in the open/close execution mode that starts when the ball enters the hole. A player may be awarded a higher value than an open-close run mode game that starts on the ball. In short, the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entering means and the second ball entering portion is the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion. A value higher than the game should be given to the player.

Further, in this embodiment, the hole 553A is a 16-round execution gate that starts execution of 16 round games, the hole 553B is a 4-round execution gate that starts execution of 4 round games, and each hole 553A, 553B , the correspondence between the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate was fixed. On the other hand, the correspondence between the holes 553A and 553B and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate need not be fixed. may According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the game playability, and can improve the attention of the player to the game.

The second crown 56 is provided along a disc-shaped rolling surface 561 for rolling the game ball guided to the second crown 56 via the guide rails 555A and 555B, and along the periphery of the rolling surface 561. and sidewalls 562 .
In addition, the guide rail 555A and the guide rail 555B guide the game ball to the rolling surface 561 along the side wall 562 .

The rolling surface 561 has three holes 563A to 563C which are formed at predetermined distances from the center thereof and which are equally spaced from each other. and a projecting portion 564 having three side surfaces that slope downward toward the 563C side. Further, the rolling surface 561 is inclined downward from the side wall 562 toward the holes 563A to 563C.
Therefore, the game ball guided to the second rune 56 through the guide rail 555A and the guide rail 555B rolls on the rolling surface 561 along the side wall 562, and then enters one of the holes 563A to 563C. (See arrow B in the figure).

In addition, the second rune 56 is connected to a hole 563A formed on the front side (front side in the figure) of the game board 31, and as shown by the arrow C in the figure, enters the hole 563A and moves downward. A communication passage 565 that guides the fallen game ball to the non-electric accessory 51, and two holes 563B and 563C formed on the back side of the game board 31 (back side in the figure). 2, there is provided a discharge passage 566 for discharging the game balls that enter the holes 563B and 563C and fall downward into the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 44).

Since the communication passage 565 guides the game ball to the non-electric accessory 51 in the same manner as the communication passage 535 in the first embodiment, it is suggested that the game ball is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 in the hole 563A. A mark is displayed around the hole 563A as shown.
Since the discharge passage 566 discharges the game balls to the game area in the same manner as the discharge passage 536 in the first embodiment, the holes 563B and 563C are provided with holes 563B to suggest that the game balls are discharged to the game area. , 563C are not marked.

<About the flow when switching to open/close execution mode>
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right variable entry mechanism when the opening/closing execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory is not opened. In addition, FIG. 46 shows a simplified non-electric accessory 51 at the bottom left of the display screen G. As shown in FIG.
Specifically, FIG. 46A is a diagram showing the display screen G at the time of transition to the opening/closing execution mode. FIGS. 46(B) and (C) are diagrams showing the non-electric accessory 51 which did not enter the open state after the ball entered the 4th round execution gate. 46(D) and (E) are diagrams showing the non-electric accessory 51 in an open state after a ball has entered the 4th round execution gate. FIG. 46(F) is a diagram showing a display screen G when an opening notification effect for notifying the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is selected as an ending effect.

When the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. It is placed at the lower left position of G, and the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped.
Here, if the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the non-open command has been received. Effect determination processing is executed, and in step S1603, a non-open effect command related to the non-open effect determined in the non-open effect determination process of step S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-open effect based on the non-open effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 prompts the player to hit to the right by displaying the angel's line "Aim for the Kroon with a right hit!" Suggest.

Moreover, MPU62 performs the setting process of a crew route in step S1005. In this crew root setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the crew root by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 sec, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving section 521c, the game ball is set to the inclination of the blade member 521a. is used to enter the right variable ball entering mechanism 52 along the blade member 521a. In addition, by setting the plate 523a to the closed state, when it is set to the crew root, after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided by the guide rail 525 be guided to After that, the game ball is guided to the first clone 55 via the guide rail 525. - 特許庁
After that, the game ball guided to the first clone 55 of the clone 53B through the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 551 along the side wall 552, and then enters one of the holes 553A and 553B. It will be.

FIG. 47 is a top view of the croon when the ball enters the 4-round execution gate. Specifically, FIG. 47A is a top view of the first crown 55, and FIGS. 47B and 47C are top views of the second crown 56. FIG.
For example, as indicated by the arrow in FIG. 47(A), when a ball enters hole 553B (fourth round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1607 that it has received a four round execution command. Since it is determined, in step S1608, determination processing of 4 rounds execution effect is executed, and in step S1609, the command for 4 rounds execution effect related to the 4 rounds execution effect determined in the determination processing of 4 rounds execution effect of step S1608 is issued. set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 4 rounds execution effect based on the command for the 4 rounds execution effect transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 46(B) and 46(D), the MPU 102 displays the angel's words "4R confirmed! Hit right!" is displayed, the player is notified that four rounds of games will be started.

Also, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Also, when a ball enters the hole 553B (fourth round execution gate), the game ball is guided to the second crew 56 via the guide rail 555B. After rolling on the rolling surface 561 along the side wall 562, the game ball enters one of the holes 563A to 563C.
For example, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. 47(B), when balls enter the holes 563B and 563C, the game balls are discharged to the game area through the discharge passage 566.

After that, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that it has received an opening command, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A determination process of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 46, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. , the game result is determined to be the "best result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92 .

After ending the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, so in step S1515, the non-electric accessory opening determination process is executed. When the game ball is discharged to the game area through the discharge passage 566, the MPU 92 determines that the non-electrical accessory 51 is not being opened in step S1515, so the opening of the non-electrical accessory 51 is played as the ending effect. Select a normal production that does not notify the person. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, in the example of FIG. 46, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. The player is notified of the shift to the high probability mode by displaying the angel's line "Probable change rush!"

Further, for example, as indicated by the arrow in FIG. 47(C), when a ball enters the hole 563A, the game ball is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the communication passage 565. After that, the game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 565 shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state.

After that, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that it has received an opening command, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A determination process of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 46, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. , the game result is determined to be the "best result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92 .

After ending the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, so in step S1515, the non-electric accessory opening determination process is executed. When the game ball is guided to the non-electrical accessory 51 in the communication passage 565, the MPU 92 determines that the non-electrical accessory 51 is being opened in step S1515. Select an opening notification effect for notifying the player of the opening of the . Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, in the example of FIG. 46, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 causes the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to appear as shown in FIG. 46(E). The player is notified of the shift to the high probability mode by displaying the angel's line "Probable change rush!" After that, as shown in FIG. 46(F), the MPU 102 displays the angel's words "The next jackpot hit is left-handed and 16R is fixed!" , to inform the player of the release of the non-electric accessory 51.例文帳に追加

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right variable entry mechanism when the opening/closing execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory is not opened. In addition, FIG. 48 shows a simplified non-electric accessory 51 at the lower left of the display screen G. As shown in FIG.
Specifically, FIG. 48A is a diagram showing the display screen G at the time of transition to the opening/closing execution mode. FIGS. 48(B) and (C) are diagrams showing the non-electric accessory 51 which did not enter the open state after the ball entered the 16-round execution gate. 48(D) and (E) are diagrams showing the non-electric accessory 51 in an open state after a ball has entered the 16-round execution gate. FIG. 48(F) is a diagram showing a display screen G when an opening notification effect for notifying the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is selected as an ending effect.

When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. It is placed at the lower left position of G, and the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped.
Here, if the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the non-open command has been received. Effect determination processing is executed, and in step S1603, a non-open effect command related to the non-open effect determined in the non-open effect determination process of step S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-open effect based on the non-open effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 prompts the player to hit to the right by displaying the angel's line "Aim for the Kroon with a right hit!" Suggest.

Moreover, MPU62 performs the setting process of a crew route in step S1005. In this crew root setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the crew root by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 sec, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving section 521c, the game ball is set to the inclination of the blade member 521a. is used to enter the right variable ball entering mechanism 52 along the blade member 521a. In addition, by setting the plate 523a to the closed state, when it is set to the crew root, after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided by the guide rail 525 be guided to After that, the game ball is guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525. - 特許庁
After that, the game ball guided to the first clone 55 of the clone 53B through the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 551 along the side wall 552, and then enters one of the holes 553A and 553B. It will be.

FIG. 49 is a top view of the croon when a ball enters the 16-round execution gate. Specifically, FIG. 49A is a top view of the first crown 55, and FIGS. 49B and 49C are top views of the second crown 56. FIG.
For example, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 49(A), when a ball enters hole 553A (16-round execution gate), the MPU 92 receives a 16-round execution command in step S1610. Therefore, in step S1611, 16 round execution effect determination processing is executed, and in step S1612, the 16 round execution effect command related to the 16 round execution effect determined in the 16 round execution effect determination processing of step S1611 is issued. set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16 rounds execution effect based on the 16 rounds execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 48(B) and 48(D), the MPU 102 displays the angel's words "16R confirmed! Hit right!" is displayed, the player is informed that the execution of 16 round games will be started.

Also, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Also, when a ball enters the hole 553A (16 round execution gate), the game ball is guided to the second crew 56 via the guide rail 555A. After rolling on the rolling surface 561 along the side wall 562, the game ball enters one of the holes 563A to 563C.
For example, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. 49(B), when a ball enters the holes 563B and 563C, the game ball is discharged to the game area through the discharge passage 566.

After that, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that it has received an opening command, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A determination process of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 48, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as a stop result. , the game result is determined to be the "best result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, it selects the effect C2 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92 .

After ending the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, so in step S1515, the non-electric accessory opening determination process is executed. When the game ball is discharged to the game area through the discharge passage 566, the MPU 92 determines that the non-electrical accessory 51 is not being opened in step S1515, so the opening of the non-electrical accessory 51 is played as the ending effect. Select a normal production that does not notify the person. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, in the example of FIG. 48, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 displays the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 as shown in FIG. 48(C). The player is notified of the shift to the high probability mode by displaying the angel's line "Probable change rush!"

Also, for example, as indicated by the arrow in FIG. 49(C), when a ball enters the hole 563A, the game ball is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the communication passage 565. As shown in FIG. After that, the game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 565 shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state.

After that, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that it has received an opening command, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A determination process of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 48, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as a stop result. , the game result is determined to be the "best result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, it selects the effect C2 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92 .

After finishing the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, so in step S1515, the non-electric accessory opening determination process is executed. When the game ball is guided to the non-electrical accessory 51 in the communication passage 565, the MPU 92 determines that the non-electrical accessory 51 is being opened in step S1515, so the non-electrical accessory 51 is displayed as the ending effect. Select an opening notification effect for notifying the player of the opening of the . Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, in the example of FIG. 48, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 causes the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to appear as shown in FIG. 48(E). The player is notified of the transition to the high-probability mode by displaying the words of an angel present in the game, ``Probable change rush!''. After that, as shown in FIG. 48(F), the MPU 102 displays the angel's words "The next big win is left-handed and 16R is fixed!" , to inform the player of the release of the non-electric accessory 51.例文帳に追加

Thus, in the present embodiment, the second rune 56 functions as a lottery rune having a rolling surface 561 (lottery rolling surface) for rolling the game balls that enter the holes 553A and 553B. there is In addition, the second crown 56 is provided on the rolling surface 561, and has holes 563A to 563C (a plurality of lottery ball entry portions) for entering game balls rolling on the rolling surface 561. The plurality of lottery ball entry parts are holes 563B and 563C (first lottery ball entry parts) that do not shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the ball entry of the game ball, It has a hole 563A (second lottery ball entry part) for shifting the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of a game ball. Therefore, the second crew 56 functions as an opening/closing lottery means for executing a lottery for the non-electric accessory 51 based on the entry of game balls into the holes 553A and 553B.

In the present embodiment, the second clown 56 is used as the open/close lottery means, but for example, a counter is used as in the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operation opening 36 and the lower operation opening 37. A lottery may be used. In addition, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing lottery means draws a lottery as to whether or not to shift the opening/closing ball entry means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry portion. A lottery may be made as to whether or not to shift the ball means from a disadvantageous state in which it is easy to close to an advantageous state in which it is easy to open. In short, the opening/closing lottery means may be any lottery as long as the lottery relating to the opening/closing ball entry means can be executed based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section.

Here, in this embodiment, the starting ball entry means includes the upper working port 36 (first starting ball entering portion) and the lower working port 37 (second starting ball entering portion).
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a left-handed route (first route) that makes it easy for game balls to enter the upper operating port 36 and makes it difficult for game balls to enter the lower operating port 37, and a lower route. It has a right-handed route (second route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the operating port 37 and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36.例文帳に追加The non-electric accessory 51 is arranged on the left-handed route.

In addition, the main controller 60 has a low frequency support mode (first game state) in which the probability of hitting the lower working port 37 is lower than the upper working port 36, and a lower working port 37 than the upper working port 36. It has a high-frequency support mode (second game state) in which the probability of hitting a ball is high, and functions as a game state switching means for switching between a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode.
Specifically, main controller 60 switches from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode after finishing the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Then, when the game result is ``explicit small round high probability result'' or ``most advantageous result'', the main controller 60 continues the high frequency support mode at least until ``winning big win'' in the lottery. . In addition, when the game result is a "low probability result", the main controller 60 executes the game round (internal lottery) for a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), and then switches from the high-frequency support mode. Switch to infrequent support mode.

Therefore, when the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result" or the "most advantageous result", the player, after finishing the game in the opening/closing execution mode, at least wins the "big win" in the lottery. A game turn can be executed by entering a game ball into the lower operation opening 37 through a right-handed route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electric accessory 51 at least until the "big win" is won in the winning lottery.

On the other hand, if the game result is a "low-probability result", after finishing the game in the open/close execution mode, until the game is executed 100 times (from the high-frequency support mode A game turn can be executed by entering a game ball into the lower operation opening 37 via a right-handed route (until switching to the low-frequency support mode). After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower operation port 37 via the right-handed route, the player can enter the game ball into the upper operation port 36 via the left-handed route to complete the game turn. can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric role 51 is arranged in the left-handed route, the player moves the non-electric role 51 from the closed state to the open state until the game is played 100 times. Furthermore, if the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state. A game can be played in anticipation of a transition.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode with no number limit and a high-frequency support mode with a number limit of 100 times, thereby providing an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player. However, by setting game states other than these, it is also possible to create advantageous game states and disadvantageous game states for the player. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player by varying the number of game rounds for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a game state advantageous to the player and a game state disadvantageous depending on whether or not to shift to the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by varying the number of game rounds in which the high-probability mode is continued after the end of the open/close execution mode. .

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 allows game balls flowing down the game area to be entered based on the results of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of game balls into the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. Since the first rune 55 is provided and the first rune 55 is provided with respective holes 553A and 553B for starting the game in the open/close execution mode when the game ball is entered, the player is in the game state with the main controller 60. to the opening/closing execution mode, the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started by entering game balls into the holes 553A and 553B. In addition, the first rune 55 has a second rune 56 that executes a lottery for the non-electric accessory 51 based on the entry of the game ball into each hole 553A, 553B. When the player wins the lottery to be executed and shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state, the player moves the game state to the next opening/closing execution mode by the main controller 60. , the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started by entering the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51 . Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A has a higher value than the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the hole 553B. Since it is given to the player, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 553A when starting the game in the opening/closing execution mode by entering the game ball into the first cloon 55.例文帳に追加In addition, when the lottery executed by the second crew 56 is won and the non-electric accessory 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state, the player changes the game state to the next time by the main controller 60. After shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the player is given a higher value than the game in the opening/closing execution mode started when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 by entering the game ball into the hole 553B. It is possible to start a game in the open/close execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) Entering a game ball into the hole 553B can start a game in an open/close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. By starting the game in the opening/closing execution mode in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be put out, the player can receive a higher value than the game in the opening/closing execution mode started when the game ball enters the hole 553B. , the player expects the ball to enter the hole 553A when starting the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

(4) In the game state transition processing, by setting the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters the hole 553B, a game in an opening/closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started. By setting the number of opening and closing times of the variable winning device 38 to a number larger than a predetermined number when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 553A, more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls are set. is started, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 553A when starting the game of the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

(5) Since the holes 553A and 553B are provided on the rolling surface 551 of the first croon 55, the player pays attention to where the game ball that hits the first croon 55 goes. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

(6) The open/close lottery means includes holes 563B and 563C that do not shift the non-electrical accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, and the non-electrical accessory 51 based on the entry of the game ball. It has a second cloon 56 with a hole 563A for transitioning from the closed state to the open state. According to this, the opening/closing lottery means operates the non-electric accessory 51 independently without being affected by the first crew 55 having the holes 553A and 553B for starting the game in the opening/closing execution mode when the game ball enters. A lottery can be made as to whether or not to shift from the closed state to the open state. In addition, when the non-electrical accessory 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state by causing the game ball that has entered the holes 553A and 553B to enter the hole 563A, the player controls the main controller 60 After shifting the game state to the next opening and closing execution mode, by entering the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51, the game in the opening and closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the hole 553B is higher It is possible to start a game in an open/close execution mode in which value is given to the player. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(7) The non-electric accessory 51 shifts from an open state to a closed state by receiving a game ball with each plate-like body 513, and is in a closed state by receiving a game ball with each lower blade member 515. Since it shifts from the state to the open state, it is possible to shift the open state using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

(8) After finishing the game in the opening and closing execution mode, the player goes down through the right-handed route until 100 game rounds are executed (until the high-frequency support mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode). A game turn can be executed by entering a game ball into the operation opening 37 . After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower operation opening 37 via the right-handed route, the player enters the game ball into the upper operation opening 36 via the left-handed route, thereby completing the game turn. can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric role 51 is arranged in the left-handed route, the player moves the non-electric role 51 from the closed state to the open state until 100 game rounds are executed. Furthermore, if the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state. A game can be played in anticipation of a transition.

[Fourth Embodiment]
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 50 is a front view of a game board according to the fourth embodiment of the invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 has the croon 53 provided in the area on the left side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 . Then, the game ball enters the hole 533A of the croon 53, falls downward, and is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 535. The non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the closed state to the open state. I was letting In addition, the game balls that entered the holes 533B and 533C of the croon 53 and fell downward were discharged to the game area through the discharge passage 536. - 特許庁
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game board 31 is provided with a cloon 53C provided in the area on the left side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, as shown in FIG. Then, all the game balls entering any one of the holes 533A to 533C (see FIG. 51) of the croon 53C move the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. different from

FIG. 51 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the croon as seen from above.
The croon 53C, as shown in FIG. 51, has a disk-shaped rolling surface 531 for rolling the game ball guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525, and is provided along the periphery of the rolling surface 531. side walls 532;
In addition, the guide rail 525 guides the game ball to the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532 .

The rolling surface 531 has three holes 533A to 533C which are formed at predetermined distances from the center of the rolling surface 531 and which are equally spaced from each other. and a projecting portion 534 having three side surfaces that slope downward toward the 533C side. Further, the rolling surface 531 is inclined downward from the side wall 532 toward the holes 533A to 533C (see FIG. 4).
Therefore, the game ball guided to the croon 53 via the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C (Fig. See middle arrow A).

The holes 533A-533C are provided with detection sensors 40i-40k (see FIG. 11) for detecting the entry of game balls, and the detection sensors 40i-40k are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. FIG. Specifically, the detection sensor 40i detects the game ball entering the hole 533A, the detection sensor 40j detects the game ball entering the hole 533B, and the detection sensor 40k detects the game ball entering the hole 533C. To detect the entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, unlike when a ball enters each of the winning holes. Further, the detection sensors 40i to 40k may be of any kind as long as they can individually detect winning of game balls. For example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

Each of the holes 533A to 533C serves as an opportunity to start the round game when a transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the opening/closing execution mode is entered. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening and closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after shifting to the opening and closing execution mode, when a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the opening and closing door 38b is set to an open state, and execution of a predetermined number of round games is started.

Specifically, when a ball enters the hole 533A, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing the round game 16 times, so the hole 533A starts executing the round game 16 times. A mark is displayed around the hole 533A to suggest that.
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing the round game four times when a ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. not marked to suggest that

In addition, the croon 53C includes a communication passage 535 for guiding the game ball to the non-electric accessory 51, and a guide path 539 for guiding the game ball that enters each hole 533A to 533C and falls downward to the communication passage 535. I have it.
The guidepath 539 includes three upstream guidepaths 539A connected to the respective holes 533A to 533C, and a downstream guidepath 539B connected to each of the upstream guidepaths 539A and connected to the communication path 535. I have it.

Thus, in this embodiment, the crew 53C, based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry ball of the game ball to the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37, the game ball flowing down the game area It is possible to enter a ball, and it functions as variable ball entry means for shifting the non-electric accessory 51 from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of a game ball.

In addition, the croon 53C is provided with holes 533B, 533C (first ball entry portion) and a hole 533A (second ball entry portion) for entering game balls entered into the croon 53C. This croon 53C has a rolling surface 531 for rolling the game ball that entered the croon 53C, and the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion are provided on the rolling surface 531, A game ball rolling on a moving surface 531 is entered.

In the present embodiment, the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the croon 53, and enter the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 531. . On the other hand, the first ball-entering section and the second ball-entering section, for example, distribute the game balls entered by the variable ball-entering means to the first ball-entering section and the second ball-entering section. It may be provided in the mechanism. In this case, the probabilities of allocating game balls to the first ball-entering section and the second ball-entering section in the distribution mechanism may be the same or different. In short, the variable ball-entering means should be provided with the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion.

Here, as described above, the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A are 16-round execution gates that initiate execution of 16-round games. Also, each hole 533B, 533C is a 4-round execution gate for starting execution of 4-round games. Therefore, the game in the opening/closing execution mode started when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is higher than the game in the opening/closing execution mode started when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. It gives value to players.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times (four times in this embodiment) when the game ball enters each of the holes 533B and 533C. A game in the opening/closing execution mode in which game balls can be paid out is started, and when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, the number of times of opening and closing the variable prize winning device 38 is increased more than a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 16 times), a game in the opening/closing execution mode is started in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be put out.

In this embodiment, the game in the opening/closing execution mode, which is started when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, is set by setting the number of times the variable winning device 38 opens and closes. The player is given a higher value than the game in the open/close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the hole 533B, 533C. A higher value may be given to the player than the game in the open/close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the game ball. In short, the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entering means and the second ball entering portion is the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion. A value higher than the game should be given to the player.

Further, in this embodiment, the hole 533A is a 16-round execution gate for starting execution of 16 round games, each hole 533B, 533C is a 4-round execution gate for starting execution of 4 round games, and each hole The correspondence between 533A-533C and the 16-round and 4-round execution gates was fixed. On the other hand, the correspondence between the holes 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gates and 4-round execution gates does not have to be fixed. may According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the game playability, and can improve the attention of the player to the game.

Here, in this embodiment, the starting ball entry means includes the upper working port 36 (first starting ball entering portion) and the lower working port 37 (second starting ball entering portion).
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a left-handed route (first route) that makes it easy for game balls to enter the upper operating port 36 and makes it difficult for game balls to enter the lower operating port 37, and a lower route. It has a right-handed route (second route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the operating port 37 and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36.例文帳に追加The non-electric accessory 51 is arranged on the left-handed route.

In addition, the main controller 60 has a low frequency support mode (first game state) in which the probability of hitting the lower working port 37 is lower than the upper working port 36, and a lower working port 37 than the upper working port 36. It has a high-frequency support mode (second game state) in which the probability of hitting a ball is high, and functions as a game state switching means for switching between a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode.
Specifically, main controller 60 switches from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode after finishing the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Then, when the game result is ``explicit small round high probability result'' or ``most advantageous result'', the main controller 60 continues the high frequency support mode at least until ``winning big win'' in the lottery. . In addition, when the game result is a "low probability result", the main controller 60 executes the game round (internal lottery) for a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), and then switches from the high-frequency support mode. Switch to infrequent support mode.

Therefore, when the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result" or the "most advantageous result", the player, after finishing the game in the opening/closing execution mode, at least wins the "big win" in the lottery. A game turn can be executed by entering a game ball into the lower operation opening 37 through a right-handed route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electric accessory 51 at least until the "big win" is won in the winning lottery.

On the other hand, if the game result is a "low-probability result", after finishing the game in the open/close execution mode, until the game is executed 100 times (from the high-frequency support mode A game turn can be executed by entering a game ball into the lower operation opening 37 via a right-handed route (until switching to the low-frequency support mode). After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower operation port 37 via the right-handed route, the player can enter the game ball into the upper operation port 36 via the left-handed route to complete the game turn. can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric role 51 is arranged in the left-handed route, the player moves the non-electric role 51 from the closed state to the open state until the game is played 100 times. Furthermore, if the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state. A game can be played in anticipation of a transition.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode with no number limit and a high-frequency support mode with a number limit of 100 times, thereby providing an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player. However, by setting game states other than these, it is also possible to create advantageous game states and disadvantageous game states for the player. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player by varying the number of game rounds for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a game state advantageous to the player and a game state disadvantageous depending on whether or not to shift to the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by varying the number of game rounds in which the high-probability mode is continued after the end of the open/close execution mode. .

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 allows game balls flowing down the game area to be entered based on the results of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of game balls into the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. The crew 53C is provided, and since the crew 53C starts the game in the opening/closing execution mode when the game ball is entered, the player shifts the game state to the opening/closing execution mode by the main controller 60, and then starts the game in the crew 53C. A game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started by entering a ball. In addition, when the non-electric accessory 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state by entering the game ball into the croon 53C, the player changes the game state with the main control device 60 to the next open/close state. After shifting to the execution mode, the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started by entering a game ball into the non-electric accessory 51. - 特許庁Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The game in the opening and closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A is faster than the game in the opening and closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. Since a high value is given to the player, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening/closing execution mode by entering the game ball into the croon 53C. . In addition, when the non-electric accessory 51 is shifted from the closed state to the open state by entering the game ball into the croon 53C, the player changes the game state with the main control device 60 to the next open/close state. After shifting to the execution mode, the game ball is entered into the non-electric accessory 51, thereby providing the player with a higher value than the game in the open/close execution mode which is started when the game ball is entered into each of the holes 533B and 533C. A game in the opening/closing execution mode to be given can be started. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) The entry of a game ball into each of the holes 533B and 533C can start a game in an open/close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the non-electric accessory 51 and the game ball into the hole 533A. The ball entry is from the game in the opening and closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters each hole 533B, 533C by starting the game in the opening and closing execution mode that can put out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. Since a high value is awarded to the player, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

(4) The game state transition processing is an open/close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number when the game balls enter the holes 533B and 533C. When the game is started and the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 and the hole 533A, the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 is set to a number greater than a predetermined number of times, thereby exceeding the predetermined number of game balls. Since the game of the opening/closing execution mode in which the game ball can be put out is started, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game of the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

(5) Since the holes 533A to 533C are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the croon 53C, the player pays attention to the destination of the game ball entering the croon 53C. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.
(6) The non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball with each plate-like body 513, and is in the closed state by receiving the game ball with each lower blade member 515. Since it shifts from the state to the open state, it is possible to shift the open state using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

(7) After finishing the game in the opening and closing execution mode, the player goes down through the right-handed route until 100 game rounds are executed (until the high-frequency support mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode). A game turn can be executed by entering a game ball into the operation opening 37 . After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower operation opening 37 via the right-handed route, the player enters the game ball into the upper operation opening 36 via the left-handed route, thereby completing the game turn. can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric role 51 is arranged in the left-handed route, the player moves the non-electric role 51 from the closed state to the open state until 100 game rounds are executed. Furthermore, if the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state. A game can be played in anticipation of a transition.

[Fifth embodiment]
A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 52 is a front view of a game board according to the fifth embodiment of the invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 has the non-electrical accessory 51 , and the non-electrical accessory 51 is provided on the lower right side of the general winning opening 35 . In addition, the game ball that entered the hole 533A of the croon 53 and fell downward was guided to the non-electric accessory 51 via the communication passage 535. - 特許庁
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the game board 31 has a rune 53D and a non-electric accessory 57, as shown in FIG. It differs from the first embodiment in that it is provided on the upper side. Also, the game ball that enters the hole 533A of the croon 53D and falls downward is different from the first embodiment in that it is guided to the non-electric accessory 57 via the communication passage 535D.

The game board 31 has, in the game area, a plurality of large and small openings formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In addition, the game board 31 includes a general winning port 35 provided at each opening, an upper operating port (first starting ball entering portion) 36, a lower operating port (second starting ball entering portion) 37, a variable winning device 38, It has an out port 39 and a non-electric accessory 57 . This non-electric accessory 57 is provided above the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 . The game board 31 also has an opening 313 provided on the lower right side of the general prize winning opening 35 . The game board 31 includes through gates 41 provided on the left and right sides of the central portion, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 43 provided on the central portion, and the like. have. In addition, the game board 31 has a large number of nails 44 planted for appropriately distributing or adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills in the game area. ing.

The non-electric accessory 57 is provided on the right side of the game area of the game board 31 . In addition, the non-electric accessory 57 includes a detection sensor 40f (see FIG. 11) for detecting the entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters the non-electric accessory 57, unlike when a ball enters the various winning holes. This non-electric accessory 57 will be described later in detail.

The variable display unit 43 includes a pattern display device 47 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a pattern, which is one type of pattern. Also, the variable display unit 43 has a center frame 48 arranged so as to surround the pattern display device 47 . The upper part of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the falling of the game balls. It is configured.

The center frame 48 includes four first holding lamp portions 49a provided in the area above the pattern display device 47, and four second holding lamp portions 49b provided in the area on the right side of the first holding lamp portion 49a. , and four third holding lamp portions 49c provided in the upper region of the first holding lamp portion 49a.
In addition, the center frame 48 includes a right variable ball entry mechanism 52 provided in the lower right region of the pattern display device 47, a croon 53D provided in the left region of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and a pattern display. and a guide mechanism 58 provided in the upper right region of the device 47 .

The right variable ball entry mechanism 52 introduces the game ball flowing down the game area into the inside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and then discharges it to the crew root that guides it to the crew 53D and the outside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. It has a function of guiding the game ball entered inside the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the crew route or the ejection route by switching the discharge route.
In addition, the player hits to the right by maximizing the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 27, and changes the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be guided to the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like (right-handed route).

The crew 53D has substantially the same configuration as the first embodiment except for the communication passage 535. As shown in FIG.
Specifically, the croon 53D is connected to a hole 533A formed on the front side (front side) of the game board 31, and moves the game ball that has entered the hole 533A and fallen downward to the non-electric accessory 57. It has a connecting passage 535D that guides to.

The guide mechanism 58 has a function of guiding the game ball flowing down the game area to the non-electric accessory 57 . Specifically, the guide mechanism 58 has a passage separated by two curved guide rails extending from the upper part of the game area to the non-electric accessory 57. It is formed to have a width that does not allow game balls to pass through at the same time.
It should be noted that the player hits to the right with the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 27 slightly weaker than the maximum, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area to the side where the exit part of the guide rail 34 is formed. The game ball can be guided into the guide mechanism 58 by reaching the entrance 58A of the guide mechanism 58 by shifting from the side to the opposite side (weakening route).

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the non-electric accessory. Specifically, FIG. 53A is a front view of the internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57, and FIG. 53B is a side view of the internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57. It is a diagram.
As shown in FIG. 53, the non-electric accessory 57 is fixed to a pair of wing members 571 provided to face each other in the horizontal direction, and to the lower end of each wing member 571, and the board surface of the game board 31. It has a pair of rotating shafts 572 that are rotatable about orthogonal axes, and a pair of disk-shaped gears 573 that are concentrically fixed to the respective rotating shafts 572 .

As shown in FIG. 53A, each blade member 571 has a facing surface 571A arranged vertically and horizontally facing each other when the non-electric accessory 57 is closed. Further, each blade member 571 is provided in the game area (the front side of the game board 31), as shown in FIG. 53(B).
Each blade member 571 is provided so as to have a width such that a plurality of game balls cannot pass through a passage 571B formed between the opposing surfaces 571A at the same time. In addition, the non-electric accessory 57 has a baffle plate 57A provided above the entrance of the passage 571B. The distance between the upper end of each blade member 571 and the baffle plate 57A is narrower than one game ball. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 57 is closed, the game ball cannot enter the non-electric accessory 57 through the entrance of the passage 571B.

Among the blade members 571 , the blade member 571 on the left side when viewed from the front side has a shaft body 571</b>C having a central axis perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 31 .
The non-electric accessory 57 has a cover 574 provided in the game area so as to cover the blade members 571 and the passage 571B.

In addition, the non-electric accessory 57 supports a cylindrical first arm portion 575A that abuts on the shaft 571C from above, and supports the first arm portion 575A. and a fan-shaped gear 575C fixed to the rotating shaft 575B.
Further, the non-electric accessory 57 supports a fan-shaped gear 576A provided so as to mesh with the gear 575C, and supports this gear 576A, and is rotatable about an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. It has a pair of rotating shafts 576B provided and a second arm portion 576C fixed to the rotating shafts 576B.

The second arm portion 576C is provided at a position to receive a game ball that enters the hole 533A of the croon 53D, falls downward, and is discharged from a discharge port formed below the communication passage 535D.
Therefore, the game ball that enters the hole 533A of the croon 53D, falls downward, and is guided to the non-electric accessory 57 through the communication passage 535D is shown in FIG. Fall towards 576C.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the non-motorized accessory when a ball enters the 16-round execution gate. Specifically, FIG. 54A is a front view of the internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57, and FIG. 54B is a side view of the internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57. It is a diagram.
The game ball dropped toward the second arm portion 576C rotates the gear 576A and the second arm portion 576C about the rotation shaft 576B as indicated by the arrow in FIG.
In addition, after rotating the second arm portion 576C, the game ball dropped toward the second arm portion 576C travels along the second arm portion 576C using the inclination of the second arm portion 576C to the discharge passage 577. enter the ball. This discharge passage 577 discharges the game ball to the game area through the opening 313 (see FIG. 52).

Further, since the rotating shaft 575B and the gear 575C rotate with the rotation of the gear 576A, the first arm portion 575A rotates with the rotation of the gear 575C. Then, the first arm portion 575A pushes down the shaft 571C. Each blade member 571 rotates about a pair of rotation shafts 572 via a pair of gears 573 by pushing down the shaft 571C with the first arm portion 575A. As a result, the non-electric accessory 57 shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Here, the non-electric accessory 57 is provided with a non-electric accessory open detection sensor 519 that detects the transition from the closed state to the open state, similarly to the non-electric accessory 51 in the first embodiment. . The non-electric accessory release detection sensor 519 may be of any type as long as it can detect the opening of the non-electric accessory 57. For example, a contact sensor or the like can be employed. .
The distance between the upper end of each blade member 571 and the baffle plate 57A is wider than one game ball when the non-electric accessory 57 is open. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 57 is open, the game ball can enter the non-electric accessory 57 through the entrance of the passage 571B.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the non-electric accessory when a ball is entered into the non-electric accessory. Specifically, FIG. 55A is a front view of the internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57, and FIG. 55B is a side view of the internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57. It is a diagram.
A game ball dropped toward the non-electric accessory 57 via the guide mechanism 58 is, as indicated by the arrow in FIG. The central position of the facing surface 571A is reached.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the non-electric accessory after a ball is entered into the non-electric accessory. Specifically, FIG. 56A is a front view of the internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57, and FIG. 56B is a side view of the internal structure of the non-electric accessory 57. It is a diagram.
The game ball that has reached the central position of the opposing surface 571A falls downward while rotating each blade member 571 as indicated by the arrow in FIG. Specifically, each blade member 571 rotates around a pair of rotation shafts 572 via a pair of gears 573 .
In addition, the game ball that has fallen downward while rotating each blade member 571 enters the discharge communication passage 578 . This discharge communication passage 578 guides the game ball to the discharge passage 577 described above, and the discharge passage 577 discharges the game ball to the game area through the opening 313 (see FIG. 52).

Among the blade members 571, the left blade member 571 as seen from the front pushes up the shaft 571C and pushes up the first arm portion 575A. The rotating shaft 575B and the gear 575C rotate as the first arm 575A rotates.

Further, since the gear 576A and the rotation shaft 576B rotate with the rotation of the gear 575C, the second arm portion 576C rotates with the rotation of the gear 576A. Then, the second arm portion 576C rises and returns to its original position. As a result, the non-electric accessory 57 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

The non-electric accessary 57 is a chance to start the round game when the internal lottery wins the shift to the opening/closing execution mode and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening and closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after shifting to the opening and closing execution mode, when a ball is entered into the non-electric accessory 57, the opening and closing door 38b is set to an open state, and execution of a predetermined number of round games is started.

Here, whether or not the ball has entered the non-electric accessory 57 is determined by detecting whether or not the game ball has passed through the discharge passage 577 with the detection sensor 40f. In other words, in the open state of the non-electric role 57, the game ball entered the non-electric role 57 through the entrance of the passage 571B, and in the closed state of the non-electric role 57, through the communication passage 535D. The game ball guided to the non-electric accessory 57 is determined as entering the non-electric accessory 57 .

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 starts executing 16 round games when a ball enters the non-electric accessory 57, so the non-electric accessory 57 has 16 rounds. Characters "16R" are displayed, which means that the execution of the game is to be started (see FIG. 52).
In the present embodiment, the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A that start executing 16 round games are called 16 round execution gates, and the holes 533B and 533C that start executing 4 round games are called 4 gates. These are called round execution gates, and 16-round execution gates and 4-round execution gates are also collectively called round game execution gates.

In this way, the non-electric accessory 57 has an open state in which the game balls flowing down the game area enter and a closed state in which the game balls flowing down the game area do not enter. It functions as opening/closing ball entry means that shifts from the open state to the closed state based on the ball entry.
Then, the non-electrical accessory 57 includes each blade member 571 (first receiving portion) that receives the game ball that has entered the non-electrical accessory 57, and the second arm portion 576C that receives the game ball that has entered the hole 533A ( 2nd receiving part), by receiving the game ball with each blade member 571, the open state is shifted to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball with the second arm 576C, the closed state is opened move to state.

In this embodiment, the opening/closing ball entry means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving a game ball at the first receiving portion, and closes by receiving a game ball at the second receiving portion. It was transitioning from a state to an open state. On the other hand, the opening/closing ball-entering means includes, for example, a drive unit that sets the opening/closing ball-entering means to either a closed state or an open state, and a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball. The drive section may shift the opening/closing ball-entering means from the open state to the closed state based on the detection of the ball entry. In short, the opening/closing ball entry means has an open state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is entered and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and the open state is based on the entry of the game ball. to the closed state.

In addition, the croon 53D allows the game ball that has entered the croon 53D to enter, and the holes 533B and 533C (first A hole 533A (a second ball entry portion) and a hole 533A (a second ball entry portion) that allows a game ball that has entered the croon 53D to be entered, and shifts the non-electric accessory 57 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. part). In addition, the croon 53D has a rolling surface 531 for rolling the game ball entered into the croon 53D, and the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion are provided on the rolling surface 531, A game ball rolling on the rolling surface 531 is entered.

In this embodiment, the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the croon 53D, and enter the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 531. . On the other hand, the first ball-entering section and the second ball-entering section, for example, distribute the game balls entered by the variable ball-entering means to the first ball-entering section and the second ball-entering section. It may be provided in the mechanism. In this case, the probabilities of allocating game balls to the first ball-entering section and the second ball-entering section in the distribution mechanism may be the same or different. In short, the variable ball-entering means should be provided with the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion.

Here, as described above, the non-motorized accessory 57 and the hole 533A are the 16 round execution gates that initiate the execution of 16 round games. Also, each hole 533B, 533C is a 4-round execution gate for starting execution of 4-round games. Therefore, the game in the opening/closing execution mode started when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A is higher than the game in the opening/closing execution mode started when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. It gives value to players.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 sets the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number of times (four times in this embodiment) when the game ball enters each of the holes 533B and 533C. A game in the opening/closing execution mode in which game balls can be paid out is started, and when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A, the number of times of opening and closing the variable prize winning device 38 is increased more than a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 16 times), a game in the opening/closing execution mode is started in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be put out.

In the present embodiment, the game in the opening/closing execution mode, which is started when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A, is set by setting the number of times the variable winning device 38 opens and closes, and the holes 533B and 533C are opened and closed. A higher value is given to the player than the game in the open/close execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the hole 533B, 533C. A higher value may be given to the player than the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the game ball. In short, the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entering means and the second ball entering portion is the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion. A value higher than the game should be given to the player.

Further, in this embodiment, the hole 533A is a 16-round execution gate for starting execution of 16 round games, each hole 533B, 533C is a 4-round execution gate for starting execution of 4 round games, and each hole The correspondence between 533A-533C and the 16-round and 4-round execution gates was fixed. On the other hand, the correspondence between the holes 533A to 533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate may not be fixed. For example, the correspondence may be changed based on the results of an internal lottery. may According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the game playability, and can improve the attention of the player to the game.

Here, in this embodiment, the starting ball entry means includes the upper working port 36 (first starting ball entering portion) and the lower working port 37 (second starting ball entering portion).
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a left-handed route (first route) that makes it easy for game balls to enter the upper operating port 36 and makes it difficult for game balls to enter the lower operating port 37, and a lower route. It has a right-handed route (second route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the operating port 37 and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36.例文帳に追加The non-electric accessory 57 is arranged on a weaker hitting route (third route) different from the left hitting route and the right hitting route.

In addition, the main controller 60 has a low frequency support mode (first game state) in which the probability of hitting the lower working port 37 is lower than the upper working port 36, and a lower working port 37 than the upper working port 36. It has a high-frequency support mode (second game state) in which the probability of hitting a ball is high, and functions as a game state switching means for switching between a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode.
Specifically, main controller 60 switches from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode after finishing the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Then, when the game result is ``explicit small round high probability result'' or ``most advantageous result'', the main controller 60 continues the high frequency support mode at least until ``winning big win'' in the lottery. . In addition, when the game result is a "low probability result", the main controller 60 executes the game round (internal lottery) for a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), and then switches from the high-frequency support mode. Switch to infrequent support mode.

Therefore, when the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result" or the "most advantageous result", the player, after finishing the game in the opening/closing execution mode, at least wins the "big win" in the lottery. A game turn can be executed by entering a game ball into the lower operation opening 37 through a right-handed route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electric accessory 51 at least until the "big win" is won in the winning lottery.

On the other hand, if the game result is a "low probability result", the player will wait until 100 game rounds are executed after finishing the game in the open/close execution mode (from the high frequency support mode A game turn can be executed by entering a game ball into the lower operation opening 37 via a right-handed route (until switching to the low-frequency support mode). After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower operation opening 37 via the right-handed route, the player enters the game ball into the upper operation opening 36 via the left-handed route, thereby completing the game turn. can be executed. In addition, since the non-electric accessory 57 is arranged on the weaker hitting route, the player shoots the game ball along a path different from the case where the game ball is entered into the upper operation opening 36 and the lower operation opening 37. By doing so, it is possible to enter the game ball into the non-electric accessory 57 . Therefore, when the non-electric role 57 is arranged in the weakening route, the player moves the non-electric role 57 from the closed state to the open state until 100 game rounds are executed. In addition, the game ball is not allowed to enter the non-electric accessory 57 even if the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the non-electric accessory 57 does not shift from the open state to the closed state, so the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode with no number limit and a high-frequency support mode with a number limit of 100 times, thereby providing an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player. However, by setting game states other than these, it is also possible to create advantageous game states and disadvantageous game states for the player. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player by varying the number of game rounds for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player depending on whether or not to shift to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by varying the number of game rounds in which the high-probability mode is continued after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 allows game balls flowing down the game area to be entered based on the results of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of game balls into the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. The crew 53D is provided, and since the crew 53D starts the game in the opening/closing execution mode when the game ball is entered, the player shifts the game state to the opening/closing execution mode by the main controller 60, and then starts the game in the crew 53D. A game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started by entering a ball. In addition, when the non-electric accessory 57 is shifted from the closed state to the open state by entering the game ball into the croon 53D, the player changes the game state with the main controller 60 to the next open/close state. After shifting to the execution mode, the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started by entering a game ball into the non-electric accessory 57 . Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game. In addition, since the non-electric accessory 57 is arranged on the weaker hitting route, the player shoots the game ball along a path different from the case where the game ball is entered into the upper operation opening 36 and the lower operation opening 37. By doing so, it is possible to enter the game ball into the non-electric accessory 57 . Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play comfortably.

(2) After finishing the game in the open/close execution mode, the player goes down through the right-handed route until 100 game rounds are executed (until the high-frequency support mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode). A game turn can be executed by entering a game ball into the operation opening 37 . After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower operation opening 37 via the right-handed route, the player enters the game ball into the upper operation opening 36 via the left-handed route, thereby completing the game turn. can be executed. In addition, since the non-electric role 57 is arranged in the weakening route, the player can play the game 100 times after shifting the non-electric role 57 from the closed state to the open state. In addition, the game ball is not allowed to enter the non-electric accessory 57 even if the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the non-electric accessory 57 does not shift from the open state to the closed state, so the player can play the game without worry.

(3) The game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A is faster than the game in the opening/closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters the holes 533B and 533C. Since a high value is given to the player, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening/closing execution mode by entering the game ball into the croon 53D. . In addition, when the non-electric accessory 57 is shifted from the closed state to the open state by entering the game ball into the croon 53D, the player changes the game state with the main controller 60 to the next open/close state. After shifting to the execution mode, the game ball is entered into the non-electric accessory 57, thereby providing the player with a higher value than the game in the open/close execution mode which is started when the game ball is entered into the holes 533B and 533C. It is possible to start a game in the opening/closing execution mode to be provided. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(4) The entry of game balls into the holes 533B and 533C can start a game in an open/close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the non-electric accessory 57 and the game balls into the hole 533A. The ball entry is from the game in the opening and closing execution mode that starts when the game ball enters each hole 533B, 533C by starting the game in the opening and closing execution mode that can put out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. Since a high value is awarded to the player, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(5) The game state transition processing is an open/close execution mode in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by setting the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 to a predetermined number when the game balls enter the holes 533B and 533C. When the game is started and the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 57 and the hole 533A, the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 38 is set to be greater than the predetermined number of times, thereby exceeding the predetermined number of game balls. Since the game of the opening/closing execution mode in which the game ball can be put out is started, the player expects the ball to enter the hole 533A when starting the game of the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(6) Since the holes 533A to 533C are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the croon 53D, the player pays attention to the destination of the game ball entering the croon 53D. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.
(7) The non-electric accessory 57 shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball with each blade member 571, and from the closed state by receiving the game ball with the second arm portion 576C. Since it shifts to the open state, it is possible to shift the open state using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

[Sixth embodiment]
A sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 57 is an enlarged view of the croon according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention, viewed from above.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 is provided with the croon 53, and when a ball is entered into the hole 533A of the croon 53, execution of the round game is started 16 times, and the hole 533B of the croon 53, When a ball was entered into 533C, four round games were started. In other words, the number of times a round game was performed was associated with each of the holes 533A-533C of the cloon 53. FIG.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game board 31 is provided with a cloon 53E, and the number of round game executions is different from the first embodiment in that it is not associated with each of the holes 533A to 533C of the cloon 53E. .

The croon 53E, as shown in FIG. 57, has a disc-shaped rolling surface 531 for rolling the game ball guided to the croon 53E via the guide rail 525, and is provided along the periphery of the rolling surface 531. side walls 532;
In addition, the guide rail 525 guides the game ball to the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532 .

The rolling surface 531 has three holes 533A to 533C which are formed at predetermined distances from the center thereof and which are equally spaced from each other. and a projecting portion 534 having three side surfaces 534A to 534C that slope downward toward the 533C side. The hole 533A is formed at the boundary between the rolling surface 531 and the side surface 534A of the projecting portion 534. As shown in FIG. The hole 533B is formed at the boundary between the rolling surface 531 and the side surface 534B of the projecting portion 534. As shown in FIG. The hole 533C is formed at the boundary between the rolling surface 531 and the side surface 534C of the projecting portion 534. As shown in FIG. Further, the rolling surface 531 is inclined downward from the side wall 532 toward the holes 533A to 533C (see FIG. 4).
Therefore, the game ball guided to the clone 53E through the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.

The holes 533A-533C are provided with detection sensors 40i-40k (see FIG. 11) for detecting the entry of game balls, and the detection sensors 40i-40k are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. FIG. Specifically, the detection sensor 40i detects the game ball entering the hole 533A, the detection sensor 40j detects the game ball entering the hole 533B, and the detection sensor 40k detects the game ball entering the hole 533C. To detect the entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, unlike when a ball enters each of the winning holes. Further, the detection sensors 40i to 40k may be of any kind as long as they can individually detect winning of game balls. For example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

Each of the holes 533A to 533C serves as an opportunity to start the round game when a transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the opening/closing execution mode is entered. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 wins the transition to the opening and closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after shifting to the opening and closing execution mode, when a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the opening and closing door 38b is set to an open state, and execution of a predetermined number of round games is started.

In addition, the croon 53E is connected to a hole 533A formed on the front side (front side) of the game board 31, and as shown by an arrow B in the drawing, a game ball that enters the hole 533A and falls downward. to the non-electric accessory 51 (see FIG. 5), and two holes 533B and 533C formed on the back side (deep side) of the game board 31. As shown, there is provided a discharge passage 536 for discharging the game balls that enter the holes 533B and 533C and fall downward into the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 2).

Side surfaces 534A to 534C of the projecting portion 534 are made of translucent resin. In addition, the protruding portion 534 includes three two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 provided vertically below each of the side surfaces 534A to 534C, and an LED driving portion 534D that independently drives the two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1. I have. By driving the two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1, the LED driving section 534D can cause the two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 to emit red or blue light, which in turn causes the side surfaces 534A to 534C to emit red or blue light. be able to.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emission Control Device 90 and Display Control Device 100>
FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing electrical configurations of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 58, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 that constitute the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as the ROM 93 and the RAM 94, are integrated into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. Output ports of the MPU 92 are connected to various lamp units 23 , 49 a to 49 c , two-color LEDs 534 A 1 to 534 C 1 , the speaker unit 24 and the display control device 100 .
The MPU 92 executes driving control of various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1, and the speaker unit 24 based on commands transmitted from the main controller 60. FIG.
Also, the MPU 92 transmits commands resulting from analysis of these commands to the display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101 , an MPU 102 , a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 that constitute the MPU 102 , a video display processor (VDP) 105 , a character ROM 106 and a video RAM 107 . Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are combined into a chip. MPU 102 , VDP 105 , character ROM 106 and video RAM 107 are mounted on display control board 101 .

The MPU 102 analyzes the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 and performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on this command to control the VDP 105 . Specifically, MPU 102 controls VDP 105 by generating commands for VDP 105 .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside for holding stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 103. The work RAM 104 is a volatile memory that requires power supply from the outside to hold the stored information. It is a memory means.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 47 . Since the VDP 105 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102 and stores the image data in the video RAM 107 .

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 47 . The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 47 , and the display contents of the pattern display device 47 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107 .

Further, in this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the prize winning process for the round game execution gate and the round number setting process are different from those in the first embodiment. The contents of the winning process for the round game execution gate and the setting process of the number of rounds in the present embodiment will be described below.

<Winning process for round game execution gate>
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a flowchart of winning processing for the round game execution gate.
In the winning process for the round game execution gate, the MPU 62 executes steps S201E to S204 as shown in FIG.

In step S201E, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the 16-round execution gate. In the present embodiment, the non-electric accessory 51 and the holes 533A to 533C set as 16 round execution gates out of the holes 533A to 533C are referred to as 16 round execution gates (round game execution gates), and the MPU 62 By determining whether or not each detection sensor 40i to 40k corresponding to the 16-round execution gate has detected the entry of the game ball, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the 16-round execution gate. The MPU 62 sets the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C to 16-round execution gates in the round number setting process described later.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S201E that the game ball has entered the 16-round execution gate, it sets a 16-round execution flag in the RAM 64 in step S202. This 16-round execution flag is a flag for specifying that the ball has entered the 16-round execution gate. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the round game execution gate.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201E that the game ball has not entered the 16th round execution gate, in step S203E, it determines whether the game ball has entered the 4th round execution gate. judge. In this embodiment, among the holes 533A to 533C, the holes 533A to 533C set as 4 round execution gates are called 4 round execution gates (round game execution gates), and the MPU 62 corresponds to the 4 round execution gates. By determining whether each detection sensor 40i to 40k has detected the entry of a game ball, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the 4th round execution gate. It should be noted that the MPU 62 sets the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C to four-round execution gates in the process of setting the number of rounds, which will be described later.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S203E that the game ball has entered the 4-round execution gate, it sets a 4-round execution flag in the RAM 64 in step S204. This 4-round execution flag is a flag for specifying that the ball has entered the 4-round execution gate. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the round game execution gate.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S203E that the game ball has not entered the 4th round execution gate, the MPU 62 does not execute the processing after step S204, and the winning prize for the round game execution gate is determined. End the process.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a process for setting the number of rounds.
In the round number setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1012 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that after executing step S1001 and before executing step S1002, step S1013E is executed.
In step S1013E, the MPU 62 executes setting processing for the round game execution gate.
The setting process for the round game execution gate will be described in detail below.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of setting processing for the round game execution gate.
In the round game execution gate setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1701E to S1703E as shown in FIG.
At step S1701E, the MPU 62 executes lottery processing for the round game execution gate. Specifically, in the lottery process of the round game execution gate, the MPU 62 executes the lottery of whether or not to set each hole 533A to 533C as the 16 round execution gate with a predetermined probability (50% in this embodiment). .

In this embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the probability of setting each of the holes 533A to 533C to the 16-round execution gate as 50%, but it may be greater than 50% or less than 50%. Further, the MPU 62 reduces the probability of setting each hole 533A to 533C as 16-round execution gates when the game result is, for example, a "low probability result", and the game result is a "best result". In this case, the probability of setting each hole 533A to 533C as a 16 round execution gate may be increased, or the probability of setting each hole 533A to 533C as a 16 round execution gate may be changed according to other game conditions. good.

In step S1702E, the MPU 62 executes a round game execution gate setting process. Specifically, in the round game execution gate setting process, the MPU 62 sets the holes 533A to 533C that have won the lottery process of the round game execution gate among the holes 533A to 533C as 16 round execution gates, and Each of the holes 533A to 533C that did not win the lottery process of the game execution gate is set as a 4-round execution gate.

When setting each hole 533A to 533C as a 16 round execution gate, the MPU 62 sets each detection sensor 40i to 40k corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C as a 16 round execution gate.
When setting each hole 533A to 533C as a 4 round execution gate, the MPU 62 sets each detection sensor 40i to 40k corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C as a 4 round execution gate.

The MPU 62 causes the RAM 64 to store execution gate information relating to the relationship between the detection sensors 40i-40k corresponding to the holes 533A-533C and the 16-round execution gates and 4-round execution gates. Then, based on the execution gate information stored in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball enters the 16th round execution gate at step S201E, and determines whether the game ball enters the 4th round execution gate at step S203E. determines whether or not has entered the ball.

In step S1703E, the MPU 62 sets a command for the round game execution gate. MPU62 transmits the command for the round game execution gates set at step S1703E to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 of normal processing. This round game execution gate command includes execution gate information relating to the relationship between the detection sensors 40i-40k corresponding to the holes 533A-533C and the 16-round execution gate and the 4-round execution gate.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the round game execution gate command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.

Thus, in this embodiment, the round game consists of the first specific game (four round games) and the second specific game (16 rounds) that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game. of the round game) and. In addition, the round game started when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 is the second specific game.
In this embodiment, the second specific game gives the player a higher value than the first specific game by making the round game execution count different. A higher value than the first specific game may be given to the player by paying out more game balls than the first specific game without changing the number of times. In short, the second specific game should give the player a higher value than the first specific game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the MPU 62, in the lottery process of the round game execution gate, selects whether or not each hole 533A to 533C is set to the 16 round execution gate at a predetermined probability (50% in this embodiment). Running. Then, in the round game execution gate setting process, the MPU 62 sets the holes 533A to 533C that have won the lottery process of the round game execution gate among the holes 533A to 533C as 16 round execution gates, and Each hole 533A to 533C that did not win the lottery process is set as a 4-round execution gate. In other words, the MPU 62 executes the lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game, and the first specific game and the second specific game to be started when the game ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C. 2 specific games are set. Then, in the game state transition process, either the first specific game or the second specific game is started when the game ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 62, in the lottery process of the round game execution gate, selects whether or not each hole 533A to 533C is set to the 16 round execution gate at a predetermined probability (50% in this embodiment). Since the game is being executed, the number of holes 533A to 533C set in the 16-round execution gate is 0 to 3 among the holes 533A to 533C.
On the other hand, the MPU 62 determines the number of holes 533A-533C to be set as 16-round execution gates among the holes 533A-533C, and then determines the holes 533A-533C to be set as 16-round execution gates. may Also, in this case, for example, when the game result is a "low probability result", the number of holes 533A to 533C to be set in the 16 round execution gates among the holes 533A to 533C is reduced and the game is played. When the result is the "best result", the number of holes 533A to 533C to be set in the 16-round execution gate may be increased, and each hole may be set according to other game conditions. Of the holes 533A to 533C, the number of holes 533A to 533C set in the 16-round execution gate may be varied.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game state transition processing in the first embodiment is performed so as to start either the first specific game or the second specific game when the game ball enters each hole 533A to 533C. Configure.
On the other hand, for example, the game state transition processing in the second, fourth and fifth embodiments is performed when the game ball is entered into each hole 533A to 533C. Either the first specific game or the second specific game may be started when the game state transition processing in the third embodiment is entered into each of the holes 553A and 553B. It may be configured to

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the effect determination process in this embodiment will be described below.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1501 to S1518 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S1508, or when it is determined in step S1501 that the variation command and the type command have not been received, step This differs from the first embodiment in that step S1519E is executed before executing S1509.
In step S1519E, the MPU 92 executes round game execution gate determination processing.
Below, the determination processing of the round game execution gate will be described in detail.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the round game execution gate determination process.
In the round game execution gate determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1801E to S1803E as shown in FIG.
In step S1801E, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the command for the round game execution gate transmitted from the MPU 62 is received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1801E that it has received the command for the round game execution gate, in step S1802E it executes determination processing of the execution gate finalization effect. In this execution gate fixed effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the contents of the effect corresponding to the command for the round game execution gate by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 .

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S1403 based on the content of the selected effect.
Furthermore, based on the execution gate information of the command for the round game execution gate, the MPU 92 causes the two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the 16 round execution gates to emit red light. Each of the side surfaces 534A to 534C is illuminated in red, and the two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the 4-round execution gates are illuminated in blue, thereby causing the side surfaces 534A to 534C to emit blue light. to emit light.

In step S1803E, the MPU 92 sets an execution gate confirmation effect command related to the execution gate confirmation effect determined in the execution gate confirmation effect determination processing in step S1802E. Then, the MPU 92 stores the execution gate determination effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 . This execution gate confirmation effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S1405 described above. Also, this execution gate confirmation effect command includes execution gate information relating to the relationship between the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C and the 16 round execution gate and the 4 round execution gate.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the execution gate confirmation effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the execution gate confirmation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the execution gate finalization effect.

<About the flow when switching to open/close execution mode>
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of the execution gate confirmation effect determination process and the execution gate confirmation effect. Specifically, FIG. 64A is a diagram showing a display screen G of the pattern display device 47. As shown in FIG. FIG. 64B is an enlarged view of the croon 53E viewed from above.
When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. The variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped.

Here, when the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1801E that the round game execution gate command is received, so in step S1802E, execution gate finalization effect determination processing is executed. , in step S1803E, the execution gate confirmation effect command related to the execution gate confirmation effect determined in the execution gate confirmation effect determination process of step S1802E is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the execution gate confirmation effect based on the execution gate confirmation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 .

In the determination processing of the execution gate finalization effect, the MPU 92, as shown in FIG. By causing the corresponding two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 to emit red light, the side surfaces 534A to 534C are caused to emit red light, and the two-color LEDs 534A1 corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the 4-round execution gates. . . . 534C1 are illuminated blue, causing each side 534A-534C to be illuminated blue.

In the example of FIG. 64, the MPU 62 sets the hole 533A as a 16-round execution gate, and sets each hole 533B, 533C as a 4-round execution gate. Therefore, the MPU 92 causes the two-color light emitting LED 534A1 corresponding to the hole 533A set for the 16-round execution gate to emit red light, thereby causing the side surface 534A to emit red light, and each of the holes set for the 4-round execution gate. By causing the two-color light emitting LEDs 534B1 and 534C1 corresponding to the holes 533B and 533C to emit blue light, the side surfaces 534B and 534C are caused to emit blue light.

In the execution gate finalization effect, the MPU 102 displays a schematic diagram SD of the croon 53E viewed from above in the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, as shown in FIG. 64(A). Then, the MPU 102, based on the execution gate information of the execution gate confirmation effect command, creates a schematic diagram SD corresponding to each side surface 534A to 534C of the rune 53E corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the 16 round execution gate. The areas are displayed in red, and the areas of the schematic diagram SD corresponding to the sides 534A to 534C of the croon 53E corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the 4-round execution gates are displayed in blue. In addition, the MPU 102 displays the words of an angel present in the lower right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, "Red is 16R, blue is 4R!" 533C is a 16-round running gate, suggesting to the player that each hole 533A-533C corresponding to the blue area is a 4-round running gate.

Thereafter, after shifting to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, as shown in FIG. A detailed description will be given of the flow when it is set to .

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right variable entry mechanism when the opening/closing execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory is not opened. In addition, FIG. 65 shows a simplified non-electric accessory 51 at the bottom left of the display screen G. As shown in FIG.
Specifically, FIG. 65(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G after execution of the execution gate confirmation effect. FIGS. 65B and 65C are diagrams showing the display screen G when a ball enters the 4th round execution gate. 65(D) and (E) are diagrams showing the display screen G when a ball enters the 16-round execution gate. FIG. 65(F) is a diagram showing a display screen G when an opening notification effect for notifying the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is selected as an ending effect.

After executing the execution gate finalization effect, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that it has received the non-opening effect command. A non-open effect command related to the non-open effect determined in the non-open effect determination process of S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-open effect based on the non-open effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(A), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line "Right-handed, aim for the croon!" to suggest to the player to hit right.

Moreover, MPU62 performs the setting process of a crew route in step S1005. In this process of setting the crew root, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the crew root by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 sec, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving section 521c, the game ball is set to the inclination of the blade member 521a. is used to enter the right variable ball entering mechanism 52 along the blade member 521a. In addition, by setting the plate 523a to the closed state, when it is set to the crew route, after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided by the guide rail 525 be guided to After that, the game ball is guided to the croon 53E via the guide rail 525.
After that, the game ball guided to the clone 53E through the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.

When a ball enters the hole 533B, 533C (fourth round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1607 that the four round execution command has been received. is executed, and in step S1609, a 4 round execution effect command related to the 4 round execution effect determined in the 4 round execution effect determination process of step S1608 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 4 rounds execution effect based on the command for the 4 rounds execution effect transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(B), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line "4R confirmed! Hit right!" The player is notified to start playing four rounds of games.

Also, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

After that, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that it has received an opening command. A determination process of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 65, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. , the game result is determined to be the "best result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92 .

After ending the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, so in step S1515, the non-electric accessory opening determination process is executed. When a ball enters each hole 533B, 533C (fourth round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines that the non-electric accessory 51 is not open in step S1515. A normal performance is selected in which the opening of 51 is not notified to the player. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, in the example of FIG. 65, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 causes the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to appear as shown in FIG. 65(C). The player is notified of the shift to the high probability mode by displaying the angel's line "Probable change rush!"

On the other hand, when the ball enters the hole 533A (16 round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1610 that the 16 round execution command has been received. A round execution effect determination process is executed, and in step S1612, a command for 16 rounds execution effect related to the 16 rounds execution effect determined in the 16 rounds execution effect determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16 rounds execution effect based on the 16 rounds execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(D), the MPU 102 displays the line of the angel "16R confirmed! Hit right!" The player is notified to start playing 16 rounds of games. In addition, the game ball that enters the hole 533A of the croon 53E and falls downward and is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 535 shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. Let

Also, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

After that, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that it has received an opening command, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A determination process of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 65, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as a stop result. , the game result is determined to be the "best result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, it selects the effect C2 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92 .

After ending the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, so in step S1515, the non-electric accessory opening determination process is executed. When the ball enters the hole 533A (16th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines that the non-electric accessory 51 is being opened in step S1515. An opening notification performance for notifying the player of the opening is selected. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, in the example of FIG. 65, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 displays the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 as shown in FIG. 65(E). The player is notified of the shift to the high probability mode by displaying the angel's line "Probable change rush!" After that, as shown in FIG. 65(F), the MPU 102 displays the angel's words "The next big win is left-handed and 16R is fixed!" , notifies the player of the release of the non-electric accessory 51.例文帳に追加

FIG. 66 is a diagram showing another example of the execution gate confirmation effect determination process and the execution gate confirmation effect. Specifically, FIG. 66A is a diagram showing a display screen G of the pattern display device 47. As shown in FIG. FIG. 66B is an enlarged view of the croon 53E viewed from above.
When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. The variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped.

Here, when the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines in step S1801E that the round game execution gate command is received, so in step S1802E, execution gate finalization effect determination processing is executed. , in step S1803E, the execution gate confirmation effect command related to the execution gate confirmation effect determined in the execution gate confirmation effect determination process of step S1802E is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the execution gate confirmation effect based on the execution gate confirmation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 .

In the determination processing of the execution gate finalization effect, the MPU 92, as shown in FIG. By causing the corresponding two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 to emit red light, the side surfaces 534A to 534C are caused to emit red light, and the two-color LEDs 534A1 corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the 4-round execution gates. Each side 534A-534C is caused to emit blue light by causing -534C1 to emit blue light.

In the example of FIG. 66, the MPU 62 sets the hole 533A as a 4-round execution gate, and sets each hole 533B, 533C as a 16-round execution gate. Therefore, the MPU 92 causes the two-color light emitting LED 534A1 corresponding to the hole 533A set for the 4-round execution gate to emit blue light, thereby causing the side surface 534A to emit blue light, and each of the holes set for the 16-round execution gate. By causing the two-color LEDs 534B1 and 534C1 corresponding to the holes 533B and 533C to emit red light, the side surfaces 534B and 534C are caused to emit red light.

In the execution gate finalization effect, the MPU 102 displays a schematic diagram SD of the croon 53E viewed from above in the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, as shown in FIG. 66(A). Then, the MPU 102, based on the execution gate information of the execution gate confirmation effect command, creates a schematic diagram SD corresponding to each side surface 534A to 534C of the rune 53E corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the 16 round execution gate. The areas are displayed in red, and the areas of the schematic diagram SD corresponding to the sides 534A to 534C of the croon 53E corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the 4-round execution gates are displayed in blue. In addition, the MPU 102 displays the words of an angel present in the lower right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, "Red is 16R, blue is 4R!" 533C is a 16-round running gate, suggesting to the player that each hole 533A-533C corresponding to the blue area is a 4-round running gate.

Thereafter, after shifting to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, as shown in FIG. A detailed description will be given of the flow when it is set to .

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right variable entry mechanism when the opening/closing execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory is not opened. Note that FIG. 67 shows the non-electric accessory 51 in the lower left corner of the display screen G in a simplified manner.
Specifically, FIG. 67A is a diagram showing the display screen G after execution of the execution gate confirmation effect. FIGS. 67B and 67C are diagrams showing the display screen G when a ball enters the 16-round execution gate. 67(D) and (E) are diagrams showing the display screen G when a ball enters the 4th round execution gate. FIG. 67(F) is a diagram showing a display screen G when an opening notification effect for notifying the player of the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is selected as an ending effect.

After executing the execution gate finalization effect, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that it has received the non-opening effect command. A non-open effect command related to the non-open effect determined in the non-open effect determination process of S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-open effect based on the non-open effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67A, the MPU 102 displays the angel's line "Right-handed, aim for the croon!" This suggests to the player to hit right.

Moreover, MPU62 performs the setting process of a crew route in step S1005. In this process of setting the crew root, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the crew root by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 sec, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving section 521c, the game ball is set to the inclination of the blade member 521a. is used to enter the right variable ball entering mechanism 52 along the blade member 521a. In addition, by setting the plate 523a to the closed state, when it is set to the crew root, after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided by the guide rail 525 be guided to After that, the game ball is guided to the croon 53E via the guide rail 525.
After that, the game ball guided to the croon 53E through the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.

When a ball enters the holes 533B and 533C (16 round execution gates), the MPU 92 determines in step S1610 that the 16 round execution command has been received. is executed, and in step S1612, a command for 16 rounds execution effect related to the 16 rounds execution effect determined in the 16 rounds execution effect determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16 rounds execution effect based on the 16 rounds execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67(B), the MPU 102 displays the line of the angel "16R confirmed! Hit right!" The player is notified to start playing 16 rounds of games.

Also, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

After that, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that it has received an opening command, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A determination process of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 67, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. , the game result is determined to be the "best result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, it selects the effect C2 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92 .

After finishing the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, so in step S1515, the non-electric accessory opening determination process is executed. When a ball enters the holes 533B and 533C (16 round execution gates), the MPU 92 determines that the non-electric accessory 51 is not open in step S1515, so the non-electric accessory 51 is displayed as an ending effect. A normal performance is selected in which the opening of the is not notified to the player. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, in the example of FIG. 67, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 displays the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 as shown in FIG. 67(C). The player is notified of the transition to the high-probability mode by displaying the words of an angel present in the game, ``Probable change rush!''.

On the other hand, if the ball enters the hole 533A (4th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1607 that the 4th round execution command has been received. Round execution effect determination processing is executed, and in step S1609, a 4 round execution effect command related to the 4 round execution effect determined in the 4 round execution effect determination processing of step S1608 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 4 rounds execution effect based on the command for the 4 rounds execution effect transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67(D), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line "4R confirmed! Hit right!" The player is notified to start playing four rounds of games. In addition, the game ball that enters the hole 533A of the croon 53E and falls downward and is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 535 shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. Let

Also, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

After that, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that it has received an opening command. A determination process of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 67, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. , the game result is determined to be the "best result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92 .

After ending the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, so in step S1515, the non-electric accessory opening determination process is executed. When the ball enters the hole 533A (fourth round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines that the non-electric accessory 51 is open in step S1515. An opening notification performance for notifying the player of the opening is selected. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, in the example of FIG. 67, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 causes the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to appear as shown in FIG. 67(E). The player is notified of the shift to the high probability mode by displaying the angel's line "Probable change rush!" After that, as shown in FIG. 67(F), the MPU 102 displays the angel's words "The next big win is left-handed and 16R is fixed!" , to inform the player of the release of the non-electric accessory 51.例文帳に追加

Thus, in the present embodiment, the hole 533A is set to the 4-round execution gate in the round game execution gate setting processing of step S1013E, and when a ball enters the hole 533A, 4 round games are executed. can be started, and the non-electric accessory 51 can be shifted from the closed state to the open state.
On the other hand, the hole 533A is set as a 16-round execution gate in the round game execution gate setting process of step S1013E, and when a ball enters the hole 533A, execution of the round game is started 16 times. In addition, the non-electric accessory 51 can be shifted from the closed state to the open state.
Therefore, when the player starts the round game by entering the game ball into the croon 53E, the player expects the game ball to enter the hole 533A and expects the start of the 16th round game. It will be.

Further, in the present embodiment, the holes 533B and 533C are set as 4-round execution gates in the round game execution gate setting processing of step S1013E, and when a ball enters the holes 533B and 533C, 4 A round of play can be started to run.
On the other hand, in the round game execution gate setting process of step S1013E, each hole 533B, 533C is set as a 16 round execution gate, and when a ball enters each hole 533B, 533C, 16 times Execution of a round game can be started.
Therefore, when the player starts the round game by entering game balls into the holes 533B and 533C, the player expects to start the round game 16 times.

Hereinafter, the flow when the opening/closing execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened will be described in detail.

FIG. 68 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the non-electric accessory, and the right variable entry mechanism when the open/close execution mode is entered when the non-electric accessory is opened. In addition, FIG. 68 shows the non-electric accessory 51 in the lower left corner of the display screen G in a simplified manner.
Specifically, FIG. 68(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G after execution of the execution gate confirmation effect. 68(B) and (C) are diagrams showing the display screen G when a ball is entered into the non-electric accessory 51. FIG.

After executing the execution gate finalization effect, the MPU 92 determines in step S1604 that the opening command has been received. A command for opening performance related to the opening performance determined in the opening performance determination processing is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the opening effect based on the opening effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, the MPU 102 suggests to the player to hit left by displaying the angel's line "Left hit 16R fixed!" .

Moreover, MPU62 performs the setting process of a crew route in step S1005. In this crew root setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the crew root by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 sec, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving section 521c, the game ball is set to the inclination of the blade member 521a. is used to enter the right variable ball entering mechanism 52 along the blade member 521a. In addition, by setting the plate 523a to the closed state, when it is set to the crew root, after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided by the guide rail 525 be guided to After that, the game ball is guided to the croon 53E via the guide rail 525.
After that, the game ball guided to the croon 53E through the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.
Incidentally, when a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C, the pachinko machine 10 executes the same processing as when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened.

When the ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 (16 round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines that the 16 round execution command has been received in step S1610, so in step S1611, 16 rounds are executed. An effect determination process is executed, and in step S1612, a command for 16 rounds execution effect related to the 16 rounds execution effect determined in the 16 rounds execution effect determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16 rounds execution effect based on the 16 rounds execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(B), the MPU 102 displays the line of the angel "16R confirmed! Hit right!" The player is notified to start playing 16 rounds of games. In addition, the game ball entering the non-electric accessory 51 through the entrance of the passage 511B shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the open state to the closed state.

Also, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

After that, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that it has received an opening command. A determination process of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 68, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. , the game result is determined to be the "best result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, it selects the effect C2 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92 .

After finishing the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, so in step S1515, the non-electric accessory opening determination process is executed. When the ball enters the non-electrical accessory 51 (16th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines that the non-electrical accessory 51 is not open in step S1515. A normal performance is selected in which the opening of 51 is not notified to the player. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, in the example of FIG. 68, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 causes the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to appear as shown in FIG. 68(C). The player is notified of the transition to the high-probability mode by displaying the words of an angel present in the game, ``Probable change rush!''.

Here, in this embodiment, the starting ball entry means includes the upper working port 36 (first starting ball entering portion) and the lower working port 37 (second starting ball entering portion).
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a left-handed route (first route) that makes it easy for game balls to enter the upper operating port 36 and makes it difficult for game balls to enter the lower operating port 37, and a lower route. It has a right-handed route (second route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the operating port 37 and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36.例文帳に追加The non-electric accessory 51 is arranged on the left-handed route.

In addition, the main controller 60 has a low frequency support mode (first game state) in which the probability of hitting the lower working port 37 is lower than the upper working port 36, and a lower working port 37 than the upper working port 36. It has a high-frequency support mode (second game state) in which the probability of hitting a ball is high, and functions as a game state switching means for switching between a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode.
Specifically, main controller 60 switches from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode after finishing the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Then, when the game result is ``explicit small round high probability result'' or ``most advantageous result'', the main controller 60 continues the high frequency support mode at least until ``winning big win'' in the lottery. . In addition, when the game result is a "low probability result", the main controller 60 executes the game round (internal lottery) for a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), and then switches from the high-frequency support mode. Switch to infrequent support mode.

Therefore, when the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result" or the "most advantageous result", the player, after finishing the game in the opening/closing execution mode, at least wins the "big win" in the lottery. A game turn can be executed by entering a game ball into the lower operation opening 37 through a right-handed route. According to this, the player can maintain the open state of the non-electric accessory 51 at least until the "big win" is won in the winning lottery.

On the other hand, if the game result is a "low-probability result", after finishing the game in the open/close execution mode, until the game is executed 100 times (from the high-frequency support mode A game turn can be executed by entering a game ball into the lower operation opening 37 via a right-handed route (until switching to the low-frequency support mode). After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the lower operation port 37 via the right-handed route, the player can enter the game ball into the upper operation port 36 via the left-handed route to complete the game turn. can be executed. Therefore, when the non-electric role 51 is arranged in the left-handed route, the player moves the non-electric role 51 from the closed state to the open state until the game is played 100 times. Furthermore, if the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball will enter the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. In this case, the non-electric accessory 51 shifts from the open state to the closed state. A game can be played in anticipation of a transition.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets a high-frequency support mode with no number limit and a high-frequency support mode with a number limit of 100 times, thereby providing an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player. However, by setting game states other than these, it is also possible to create advantageous game states and disadvantageous game states for the player. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player by varying the number of game rounds for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player depending on whether or not to shift to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by varying the number of game rounds in which the high-probability mode is continued after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

Here, if the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is made when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, the player causes the ball to enter the holes 533A to 533C of the croon 53E, or enters the non-electric accessory 51. You can choose to spawn a sphere.
Therefore, for example, the player shifts to the opening and closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, and if the game result is "explicitly small round high probability result" or "best result", run 53E By aiming to enter the 16-round execution gate or the 4-round execution gate, it is possible to continue the high probability mode while maintaining the open state of the non-electric accessory 51 . After that, the player shifts to the opening/closing execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened, and when the game result is "low probability result", by aiming to enter the non-electric accessory 51, Since the non-electric role 51 can be shifted from the open state to the closed state, the player executes 100 game rounds after shifting the non-electric role 51 from the closed state to the open state. If the game state is not shifted to the opening/closing execution mode by then, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball is entered into the non-electric accessory 51 via the left-handed route. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

In addition, when the non-electric accessory 51 is opened and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the player, based on the result of the execution gate confirmation effect, causes the ball to enter each of the holes 533A to 533C of the crew 53E. , to generate a ball entry into the non-electric accessory 51.
For example, the player compares the number of 16-round execution gates with the number of 4-round execution gates, and if the number of 16-round execution gates is greater (see, for example, FIG. 66), 16-round execution of Krun 53E By aiming to enter the gate or the 4-round execution gate, it is possible to aim for the Kroon 53E to enter the 16-round execution gate while maintaining the non-electric accessory 51 in an open state. In particular, when the number of 16-round execution gates is three, that is, when the player sets all of the holes 533A to 533C as 16-round execution gates in the round game execution gate setting process of step S1013E, By aiming at the entry of the Kroon 53E into the 16th round execution gate, it is possible to surely aim for the entry of the Kleon 53E into the 16th round execution gate while maintaining the open state of the non-electric accessory 51.例文帳に追加According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

In this embodiment, the opening/closing ball entry means shifts from the open state to the closed state based on the entry of one game ball, but the open state is changed to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls. It may transition to a closed state.
When the opening/closing ball-entering means is configured in this way, for example, the player maintains the open state of the opening/closing ball-entering means even after entering the first game ball into the opening/closing ball-entering means. Therefore, the order of aiming at the round game execution gate can be diversified. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can further expand the player's options and further improve the player's attention to the game.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same effects and effects as (6) and (7) in the first embodiment, the following effects and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 allows game balls flowing down the game area to be entered based on the results of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of game balls into the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. Since the rune 53E is provided, and the rune 53E is provided with each hole 533A to 533C for starting the game in the opening and closing execution mode when the game ball is entered, the player can switch the game state to the opening and closing execution mode by the main controller 60. , the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started by entering game balls into the holes 533A to 533C. In addition, since the hole 533A shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, the player can shift the game state to the next opening/closing execution mode by the main controller 60. After that, by entering a game ball into the non-electric accessory 51, the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The game in the opening/closing execution mode includes a first specific game and a second specific game that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game, and the game state transition process includes each hole 533A. Since either the first specific game or the second specific game is started when the game ball is entered to 533C, the player can play the game in the opening and closing execution mode by entering the game ball into the cloon 53E. is to be started, the start of the second specific game is expected. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can further increase the attention of the player to the game.
(3) The main control device 60 executes a lottery to select the first specific game and the second specific game, thereby starting the first specific game when the game ball enters each hole 533A to 533C. and the second specific game are set, the player pays attention to the result of the lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

(4) The game state transition process starts a first specific game capable of paying out a predetermined number of game balls, and starts a second specific game capable of paying out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. When the player starts the opening/closing execution mode game, the player expects the start of the second specific game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(5) In the game state transition processing, by setting the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed to a predetermined number of times, the first specific game in which a predetermined number of game balls can be put out is started, and the number of times the variable winning device 38 is opened and closed is started. By setting the number of times to be greater than the predetermined number of times, the second specific game in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be put out is started, so that the player can start the game in the opening/closing execution mode. , the start of the second specific game is expected. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(6) Since the holes 533A to 533C are provided on the rolling surface 531 of the croon 53E, the player pays attention to the destination of the game ball entering the croon 53E. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

[Seventh embodiment]
A seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the sixth embodiment, the game board 31 is equipped with a cloon 53E, and the game ball guided to the cloon 53E enters one of the holes 533A to 533C and enters the holes 533A to 533C of the cloon 53E. When the ball was generated, the execution of 16 rounds or 4 rounds was started. In other words, the game ball guided to the croon 53E has started execution of the round game without exception.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the game ball guided to the croon 53E is different from the sixth embodiment in that the execution of the round game is not necessarily started.

Further, in this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the sixth embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the setting process for the round game execution gate is different from that in the sixth embodiment. The contents of the setting process for the round game execution gate in this embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a flow chart of setting processing for the round game execution gate according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention.
In the round game execution gate setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1704F to S1703F. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the MPU 92 executes steps S1701F and S1703F instead of steps S1701E and S1703E, and executes step S1704F before executing step S1701F. Different from the embodiment.

In step S1704F, the MPU 62 executes replay gate selection processing. Specifically, in the replay gate selection process, the MPU 62 selects one of the holes 533A to 533C and sets it as a replay gate. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 selects one of the holes 533A to 533C and sets it as a replay gate, but may select a plurality of holes and set them as a replay gate. Moreover, although the selection probabilities of the holes 533A to 533C are the same in this embodiment, they may be different.

When setting the holes 533A to 533C as replay gates, the MPU 62 sets the detection sensors 40i to 40k corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C as replay gates.
Specifically, when a ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate, the pachinko machine 10 generates a prize ball ( In this embodiment, three payouts are executed. The pachinko machine 10, for example, sets the hole 533A as the replay gate in the replay gate selection process of step S1704F, and when a ball enters the hole 533A, pays out three prize balls, When balls enter the holes 533B and 533C, no prize balls are paid out.

In step S1701F, the MPU 62 executes lottery processing for the round game execution gate. Specifically, in the lottery process of the round game execution gate, the MPU 62 draws a lottery as to whether or not to set the holes 533A to 533C that have not been set as the replay gates among the holes 533A to 533C as the 16 round execution gates. is executed with a predetermined probability (50% in this embodiment).

In step S1702E, the MPU 62 executes a round game execution gate setting process. Specifically, in the round game execution gate setting process, the MPU 62 sets the holes 533A to 533C that have won the lottery process of the round game execution gate among the holes 533A to 533C as 16 round execution gates, and Each of the holes 533A to 533C that did not win the lottery process of the game execution gate is set as a 4-round execution gate.

When setting each hole 533A to 533C as a 16 round execution gate, the MPU 62 sets each detection sensor 40i to 40k corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C as a 16 round execution gate.
When setting each hole 533A to 533C as a 4 round execution gate, the MPU 62 sets each detection sensor 40i to 40k corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C as a 4 round execution gate.

The MPU 62 causes the RAM 64 to store execution gate information relating to the relationship between the detection sensors 40i-40k corresponding to the holes 533A-533C and the replay gate, 16-round execution gate, and 4-round execution gate. Then, based on the execution gate information stored in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball enters the 16th round execution gate at step S201E, and determines whether the game ball enters the 4th round execution gate at step S203E. determines whether or not has entered the ball.

In step S1703F, the MPU 62 sets a round game execution gate command. The MPU 62 transmits the command for the round game execution gate set in step S1703F to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 of normal processing. This round game execution gate command includes execution gate information relating to the relationship between the detection sensors 40i-40k corresponding to the holes 533A-533C, the replay gate, the 16-round execution gate, and the 4-round execution gate. .
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the round game execution gate command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.

Thus, in this embodiment, the round game consists of the first specific game (four round games) and the second specific game (16 rounds) that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game. of the round game) and. In addition, the round game that starts when the game ball enters the non-electric accessory 51 is the second specific game.
In this embodiment, the second specific game gives the player a higher value than the first specific game by making the round game execution count different. A higher value than the first specific game may be given to the player by paying out more game balls than the first specific game without changing the number of times. In short, the second specific game should give the player a higher value than the first specific game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the MPU 62, in the lottery process of the round game execution gate, selects whether or not each hole 533A to 533C is set to the 16 round execution gate at a predetermined probability (50% in this embodiment). Running. Then, in the round game execution gate setting process, the MPU 62 sets the holes 533A to 533C that have won the lottery process for the round game execution gate among the holes 533A to 533C as 16 round execution gates, and Each hole 533A to 533C that did not win the lottery process is set as a 4-round execution gate. In other words, the MPU 62 executes the lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game, and the first specific game and the second specific game to be started when the game ball enters each hole 533A to 533C. 2 specific games are set. Then, in the game state transition process, either the first specific game or the second specific game is started when the game ball enters each of the holes 533A to 533C.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 62, in the lottery process of the round game execution gate, selects whether or not each hole 533A to 533C is set to the 16 round execution gate at a predetermined probability (50% in this embodiment). Since it is executed, the number of holes 533A to 533C set in the 16-round execution gate is 0 to 2 among the holes 533A to 533C.
On the other hand, the MPU 62 determines the number of holes 533A-533C to be set as 16-round execution gates among the holes 533A-533C, and then determines the holes 533A-533C to be set as 16-round execution gates. may Also, in this case, for example, when the game result is a "low probability result", the number of holes 533A to 533C to be set in the 16 round execution gates among the holes 533A to 533C is reduced and the game is played. When the result is the "best result", the number of holes 533A to 533C to be set in the 16-round execution gate may be increased, and each hole may be set according to other game conditions. Of the holes 533A to 533C, the number of holes 533A to 533C set in the 16-round execution gate may be varied.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the sixth embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the round game execution gate determination process is different from that in the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the determination processing of the round game execution gate in this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the round game execution gate determination process.
In the round game execution gate determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1801E to S1803F. In this embodiment, the MPU 92 differs from the sixth embodiment in that, as shown in FIG. 70, steps S1802F and S1803F are executed instead of steps S1802E and S1803E.

In step S1801E, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the command for the round game execution gate transmitted from the MPU 62 is received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1801E that it has received the command for the round game execution gate, in step S1802F it executes determination processing of the execution gate finalization effect. In this execution gate finalization effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the contents of the effect corresponding to the command for the round game execution gate by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 .

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S1403 based on the content of the selected effect.
Furthermore, based on the execution gate information of the round game execution gate command, the MPU 92 emits red light from the two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the 16 round execution gates. Each of the side surfaces 534A to 534C is illuminated in red, and the two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the 4-round execution gates are illuminated in blue to emit blue light. to emit light. Then, based on the execution gate information of the command for the round game execution gate, the MPU 92 does not emit light from the two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate. Side surfaces 534A to 534C are made not to emit light.

In step S1803F, the MPU 92 sets an execution gate confirmation effect command related to the execution gate confirmation effect determined in the execution gate confirmation effect determination process of step S1802F. Then, the MPU 92 stores the execution gate determination effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 . This execution gate confirmation effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S1405 described above. Also, this execution gate determination effect command includes execution gate information relating to the relationship between the detection sensors 40i-40k corresponding to the holes 533A-533C, the replay gate, the 16-round execution gate, and the 4-round execution gate. I'm in.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the execution gate confirmation effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the execution gate confirmation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the execution gate finalization effect.

<About the flow when switching to open/close execution mode>
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of the execution gate confirmation effect determination process and the execution gate confirmation effect. Specifically, FIG. 71(A) is a diagram showing a display screen G of the pattern display device 47. As shown in FIG. FIG. 71B is an enlarged view of the croon 53E viewed from above.
When shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. The variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped.

Here, when the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the command for the round game execution gate is received in step S1801E. , in step S1803F, the execution gate confirmation effect command related to the execution gate confirmation effect determined in the execution gate confirmation effect determination process of step S1802F is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the execution gate confirmation effect based on the execution gate confirmation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 .

In the determination processing of the execution gate finalization effect, the MPU 92, as shown in FIG. By causing the corresponding two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 to emit red light, the side surfaces 534A to 534C are caused to emit red light, and the two-color LEDs 534A1 corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the 4-round execution gates. Each side 534A-534C is caused to emit blue light by causing -534C1 to emit blue light. Then, based on the execution gate information of the command for the round game execution gate, the MPU 92 does not emit light from the two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate. Side surfaces 534A to 534C are made not to emit light.

In the example of FIG. 71, the MPU 62 sets the hole 533A as a 16-round execution gate and the hole 533B as a 4-round execution gate. Therefore, the MPU 92 causes the two-color light emitting LED 534A1 corresponding to the hole 533A set for the 16-round execution gate to emit red light, thereby causing the side surface 534A to emit red light, and the hole 534A set for the 4-round execution gate. By causing the two-color LED 534B1 corresponding to 533B to emit blue light, the side surface 534B is caused to emit blue light.
Also, in the example of FIG. 71, the MPU 62 sets the hole 533C as the replay gate. Therefore, the MPU 92 prevents the side surface 534C from emitting light by preventing the two-color light emitting LED 534C1 corresponding to the hole 533C set in the replay gate from emitting light.

In the execution gate finalization effect, the MPU 102 displays a schematic diagram SD of the croon 53E viewed from above in the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, as shown in FIG. 71(A). Then, the MPU 102, based on the execution gate information of the execution gate confirmation effect command, creates a schematic diagram SD corresponding to each side surface 534A to 534C of the rune 53E corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the 16-round execution gate. The areas are displayed in red, and the areas of the schematic diagram SD corresponding to the sides 534A to 534C of the croon 53E corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the 4-round execution gates are displayed in blue. In addition, based on the execution gate information of the execution gate confirmation effect command, the MPU 102 selects the area of the schematic diagram SD corresponding to each side surface 534A to 534C of the rune 53E corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the replay gate. Displayed in white. In addition, the MPU 102 displays the line of the angel "Red is 16R, blue is 4R!" on the lower right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, so that each hole 533A corresponding to the red area is displayed. 533C is a 16-round running gate, suggesting to the player that each hole 533A-533C corresponding to the blue area is a 4-round running gate.

Thereafter, after shifting to the open/close execution mode when the non-electric accessory 51 is not opened, as shown in FIG. , and hole 533C are set as replay gates will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, regardless of the setting status of the round game execution gate and the opening status of the non-electric accessory 51, the flow when a ball enters the replay gate is the same, so the setting status of the round game execution gate, A description corresponding to the open state of the non-electric accessory 51 is omitted.

After executing the execution gate finalization effect, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that it has received the non-opening effect command. A non-open effect command related to the non-open effect determined in the non-open effect determination process of S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-open effect based on the non-open effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(A), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line "Right-handed, aim for the croon!" to suggest to the player to hit right.

Moreover, MPU62 performs the setting process of a crew route in step S1005. In this process of setting the crew root, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the crew root by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 sec, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving section 521c, the game ball is set to the inclination of the blade member 521a. is used to enter the right variable ball entering mechanism 52 through the blade member 521a. In addition, by setting the plate 523a to the closed state, when it is set to the crew route, after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided by the guide rail 525 be guided to After that, the game ball is guided to the croon 53E via the guide rail 525.
After that, the game ball guided to the clone 53E through the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.

When the ball enters the hole 533B (4th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1607 that the 4th round execution command has been received. Processing is executed, and in step S1609, a command for 4 rounds execution effect related to the 4 rounds execution effect determined in the 4 rounds execution effect determination process of step S1608 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 4 rounds execution effect based on the command for the 4 rounds execution effect transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(B), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line "4R confirmed! Hit right!" The player is notified to start playing four rounds of games.

Also, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

After that, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that it has received an opening command. A determination process of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 65, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. , the game result is determined to be the "best result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92 .

After ending the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, so in step S1515, the non-electric accessory opening determination process is executed. When the ball enters the hole 533B (fourth round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines that the non-electric accessory 51 is not open in step S1515, so the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is performed as an ending effect. is selected to select a normal effect that does not notify the player. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, in the example of FIG. 65, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 causes the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to appear as shown in FIG. 65(C). The player is notified of the shift to the high probability mode by displaying the angel's line "Probable change rush!"

On the other hand, if the ball enters the hole 533A (16 round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1610 that the 16 round execution command has been received. A round execution effect determination process is executed, and in step S1612, a command for 16 rounds execution effect related to the 16 rounds execution effect determined in the 16 rounds execution effect determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16 rounds execution effect based on the 16 rounds execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(D), the MPU 102 displays the line of the angel "16R confirmed! Hit right!" The player is notified to start playing 16 rounds of games. In addition, the game ball that enters the hole 533A of the croon 53E and falls downward and is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 535 shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. Let

Also, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

After that, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that it has received an opening command, so in step S1511 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command, and determines the type of game result determined in step S1511. A determination process of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 65, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as a stop result. , the game result is determined to be the "best result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, it selects the effect C2 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92 .

After ending the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, so in step S1515, the non-electric accessory opening determination process is executed. When the ball enters the hole 533A (16th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines that the non-electric accessory 51 is being opened in step S1515. An opening notification performance for notifying the player of the opening is selected. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, in the example of FIG. 65, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 displays the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 as shown in FIG. 65(E). The player is notified of the transition to the high-probability mode by displaying the words of an angel present in the game, ``Probable change rush!''. After that, as shown in FIG. 65(F), the MPU 102 displays the angel's words "The next jackpot hit is left-handed and 16R is fixed!" , to notify the player of the release of the non-electric accessory 51.例文帳に追加

Then, when a ball enters the hole 533C (replay gate), the MPU 62 pays out three prize balls.
Moreover, since it determines with the round game execution flag not being set to RAM64 in step S1006, MPU62 does not perform the setting process of the discharge route of step S1012. Therefore, the MPU 62 maintains the state where the plate 523a is set to the closed state and the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is set to the crew route. In other words, the game ball travels along the blade member 521a using the inclination of the blade member 521a and enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 anew. As long as no balls enter the round execution gate, prize balls can be paid out.

Thus, in this embodiment, the holes 533A to 533C set in the 16 round execution gates and the holes 533A to 533C set in the 4 round execution gates enter the game balls entered in the clown 53E. It functions as a specific ball entry section that controls a round game based on the entry of a game ball. In addition, each hole 533A~533C set in the replay gate, it is possible to enter the game ball that has entered the clun 53E, functions as a non-specific ball entry portion that does not control the round game based on the entry of the game ball.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the specific ball entry unit controls the round game by starting the round game based on the game ball entry, and the non-specific ball entry unit controls the round game based on the game ball entry. by not starting the round play. On the other hand, for example, the game state transition means starts a round game regardless of whether the game ball enters the specific ball entry section or the non-specific ball entry section, and the specific ball entry section receives the game ball entry. The round game is controlled by shifting to the high probability mode based on the ball, and the non-specific ball entry unit does not control the round game by not shifting to the high probability mode based on the game ball entering. may In short, the specific ball entry section controls the round game based on the game ball entry, and the non-specific ball entry section should not control the round game based on the game ball entry.

In addition, in this embodiment, the non-specific ball-entering section is set so as not to shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, and the specific ball-entering section It is set to shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball.
Further, in the present embodiment, the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate execute payout of game balls based on the entry of game balls. In this embodiment, the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate execute payout of game balls based on the entry of game balls, but the payout of game balls may not be executed.

According to this embodiment, the same actions and effects as (6) and (7) in the first embodiment and (4) to (6) in the sixth embodiment can be obtained. , the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 allows game balls flowing down the game area to be entered based on the results of internal lottery executed based on the entry of game balls into the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37. The crew 53E is provided, and the crew 53E has a specific ball entry unit that controls the game in the opening/closing execution mode when the game ball is entered, so the player can switch the game state to the opening/closing execution mode by the main controller 60. After the shift, the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be controlled by entering the game ball into the specific ball entering section. In addition, since the non-specific ball entry section does not control the game in the specific control state based on the entry of the game ball, the player can enter the game ball again into the crew 53E. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

(2) Since the non-specific ball entry section executes the payout of game balls based on the entry of game balls, the player, after shifting the game state to the opening/closing execution mode with the main controller 60, By entering the game balls into the ball section, the number of game balls can be increased without starting the game in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(3) The specific ball entry unit shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. After shifting to the state, the game in the opening/closing execution mode can be started by entering the game ball into the non-electric accessory 51 . Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

(4) The game in the opening and closing execution mode includes a first specific game and a second specific game that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game, and the game state transition process includes a specific ball entry. Since either the first specific game or the second specific game is started when the game ball enters the part, the player starts the round game by entering the game ball into the specific ball entry part. If so, the player expects the start of the second specific game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can further increase the attention of the player to the game.
(5) The main controller 60 executes a lottery to select the first specific game and the second specific game, thereby starting the first specific game and Since the second specific game is set, the player will pay attention to the result of the lottery to select the first specific game and the second specific game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the non-specific ball-entering section is set so as not to shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, and the specific ball-entering section Although it is set to shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, the opposite relationship may be set. Specifically, the specific ball entry portion is set so as not to shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, and the non-specific ball entry portion The non-electric accessory 51 may be set to shift from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the ball.
According to this, the non-specific ball entry section shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. By entering a ball, a round game can be started without entering a game ball into a specific ball entering section. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

[Eighth Embodiment]
An eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the seventh embodiment, the crew 53E has a hole 533C set as a replay gate, and when a ball enters the hole 533C, the MPU 62 pays out three prize balls. .
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a ball enters the hole 533C (replay gate), the MPU 62 performs replay gate selection processing, round game execution gate lottery processing, round game execution gate It is different from the seventh embodiment in that the setting process of is re-executed.

Further, in this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the seventh embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the prize winning process for the round game execution gate and the round number setting process are different from those in the seventh embodiment. The contents of the winning process for the round game execution gate and the setting process of the number of rounds in the present embodiment will be described below.

<Winning process for round game execution gate>
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a flowchart of prize winning processing for the round game execution gate according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention.
In the winning process for the round game execution gate, the MPU 62 executes steps S201E to S206G. It should be noted that in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S205G when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the 4th round execution gate at step S203E. is different from the seventh embodiment.

In step S205G, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the replay gate. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the replay gate by determining whether each detection sensor 40i to 40k corresponding to the replay gate has detected the game ball entering the replay gate. judge.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S205G that the game ball has entered the replay gate, it sets a replay flag in the RAM 64 in step S206G. This replay flag is a flag for specifying that the ball has entered the replay gate. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the round game execution gate.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the game ball has not entered the replay gate at step S205G, the winning process for the round game execution gate is executed without executing the process after step S206G. finish.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a process for setting the number of rounds.
In the round number setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1012 in substantially the same manner as in the seventh embodiment. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, the MPU 92 executes the processing after step S1014G when it is determined that the round game execution flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S1006. It differs from the seventh embodiment.

When the MPU 62 determines that the round game execution flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S1006, it determines whether or not the replay flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1014G. In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the replay gate after executing the setting process of the crew route.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1014G that the replay flag is not set in the RAM 64, it executes step S1006 again.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the replay flag is set in the RAM 64 at step S1014G, at step S1015G, the setting process for the round game execution gate is executed. The setting process for the round game execution gate in step S1015G is the same as the setting process for the round game execution gate in step S1013E.

In step S1016G, MPU62 clears the replay flag memorize|stored in RAM64.
In step S1017G, the MPU 62 sets a gate reset command, and then executes step S1006 again. The MPU 62 transmits the gate reset command set in step S1017G to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 of normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the gate resetting command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the seventh embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the round game execution gate determination process is different from that in the seventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the determination processing of the round game execution gate in this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the round game execution gate determination process.
In the round game execution gate determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1801E to S1803F. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1804G when it determines that the command for the round game execution gate is received in step S1801E. It differs from the seventh embodiment.

In step S1804G, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the gate reset command transmitted from the MPU 62 has been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1804G that the gate resetting command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S1802F onward, as in the seventh embodiment.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1804G that the gate resetting command has been received, in step S1805G, the gate resetting effect determination process is executed. In this gate resetting effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the contents of the effect corresponding to the gate resetting command by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 .

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S1403 based on the content of the selected effect.

In step S1806G, the MPU 92 sets a gate resetting effect command related to the gate resetting effect determined in the gate resetting effect determination process of step S1805G. Then, the MPU 92 stores the gate reset effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 . This gate reset effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the above-described command transmission processing of step S1405.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the gate resetting effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the gate resetting effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 47 executes the gate resetting effect.

<About the flow when switching to open/close execution mode>
71, the MPU 62 sets the hole 533A as a 16-round execution gate and the hole 533B as a 4-round execution gate. , and hole 533C are set as replay gates will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, regardless of the setting status of the round game execution gate and the opening status of the non-electric accessory 51, the flow when a ball enters the replay gate is the same, so the setting status of the round game execution gate, A description corresponding to the open state of the non-electric accessory 51 is omitted.

After executing the execution gate finalization effect, the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that it has received the non-opening effect command. A non-open effect command related to the non-open effect determined in the non-open effect determination process of S1602 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the non-open effect based on the non-open effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(A), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line "Right-handed, aim for the croon!" to suggest to the player to hit right.

Moreover, MPU62 performs the setting process of a crew route in step S1005. In this crew root setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the closed state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the crew root by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

Here, since the blade member 521a is intermittently opened and closed at a cycle of 2 sec, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving section 521c, the game ball is set to the inclination of the blade member 521a. is used to enter the right variable ball entering mechanism 52 along the blade member 521a. In addition, by setting the plate 523a to the closed state, when it is set to the crew root, after entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided by the guide rail 525 be guided to After that, the game ball is guided to the croon 53E via the guide rail 525.
After that, the game ball guided to the croon 53E through the guide rail 525 rolls on the rolling surface 531 along the side wall 532, and then enters one of the holes 533A to 533C.

When the ball enters the hole 533B (4th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1607 that the 4th round execution command has been received. Processing is executed, and in step S1609, a command for 4 rounds execution effect related to the 4 rounds execution effect determined in the determination processing of 4 rounds execution effect of step S1608 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 4 rounds execution effect based on the command for the 4 rounds execution effect transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(B), the MPU 102 displays the angel's line "4R confirmed! Hit right!" The player is notified to start playing four rounds of games.

Also, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

After that, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that it has received an opening command. A determination process of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 65, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. , the game result is determined to be the "best result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is four, it selects the effect C1 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92 .

After ending the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, so in step S1515, the non-electric accessory opening determination process is executed. When the ball enters the hole 533B (fourth round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines that the non-electric accessory 51 is not open in step S1515, so the opening of the non-electric accessory 51 is performed as an ending effect. is selected to select a normal effect that does not notify the player. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, in the example of FIG. 65, since the effect C1 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 causes the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to appear as shown in FIG. 65(C). The player is notified of the shift to the high probability mode by displaying the angel's line "Probable change rush!"

On the other hand, when the ball enters the hole 533A (16 round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1610 that the 16 round execution command has been received. A round execution effect determination process is executed, and in step S1612, a command for 16 rounds execution effect related to the 16 rounds execution effect determined in the 16 rounds execution effect determination process of step S1611 is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the 16 rounds execution effect based on the 16 rounds execution effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(D), the MPU 102 displays the line of the angel "16R confirmed! Hit right!" The player is notified to start playing 16 rounds of games. In addition, the game ball that enters the hole 533A of the croon 53E and falls downward and is guided to the non-electric accessory 51 through the communication passage 535 shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state. Let

Also, the MPU 62 executes a discharge route setting process in step S1012. In this ejection route setting process, the MPU 62 sets the plate 523a to the open state and sets the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the ejection route by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 523c (see the arrow in the figure). ).

After that, the MPU 92 determines in step S1510 that it has received an opening command. A determination process of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed. In the example of FIG. 65, the symbol display device 47 stops and displays a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers (7, 7, 7) on the effective line L as the stop result. , the game result is determined to be the "best result". Further, since the MPU 92 determines that the number of round games is 16, it selects the effect C2 as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 102 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 92 .

After ending the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has been received in step S1514, so in step S1515, the non-electric accessory opening determination process is executed. When the ball enters the hole 533A (16th round execution gate), the MPU 92 determines that the non-electric accessory 51 is being opened in step S1515. An opening notification performance for notifying the player of the opening is selected. Then, the MPU 102 executes the ending effect selected by the MPU 92 based on the ending effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Specifically, in the example of FIG. 65, since the effect C2 is selected as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 displays the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 as shown in FIG. 65(E). The player is notified of the shift to the high probability mode by displaying the angel's line "Probable change rush!" After that, as shown in FIG. 65(F), the MPU 102 displays the angel's words "The next big win is left-handed and 16R is fixed!" , to inform the player of the release of the non-electric accessory 51.例文帳に追加

Then, when a ball enters the hole 533C (replay gate), the MPU 62 pays out three prize balls.
Moreover, since it determines with the round game execution flag not being set to RAM64 in step S1006, MPU62 does not perform the setting process of the discharge route of step S1012. Therefore, the MPU 62 maintains the state where the plate 523a is set to the closed state and the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 is set to the crew route. In other words, the game ball travels along the blade member 521a using the inclination of the blade member 521a and enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 anew. As long as no balls enter the round execution gate, prize balls can be paid out.

Also, when the ball enters the hole 533C (replay gate), the MPU 92 determines in step S1804G that it has received a gate reset command, so in step S1805G, the gate reset effect is determined. Processing is executed, and in step S1806G, a command for gate resetting effect related to the gate resetting effect determined in the gate resetting effect determination process of step S1805G is set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the gate resetting effect based on the gate resetting effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 .

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a gate reset effect. Specifically, FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the pattern display device 47. As shown in FIG.
In the gate resetting effect, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. Suggest the player to perform resetting of execution gates and replay gates.

After that, in step S1802F, the MPU 92 executes the execution gate confirmation effect determination processing, and in step S1803F, the execution gate confirmation effect command related to the execution gate confirmation effect determined in the execution gate confirmation effect determination processing of step S1802F. set. Then, the MPU 102 executes the execution gate confirmation effect based on the execution gate confirmation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 .

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of the determination processing of the execution gate confirmation effect and the execution gate confirmation effect after executing the gate resetting effect. Specifically, FIG. 76A is a diagram showing a display screen G of the pattern display device 47. As shown in FIG. FIG. 76B is an enlarged view of the croon 53E viewed from above.

In the determination processing of the execution gate finalization effect, the MPU 92, as shown in FIG. By causing the corresponding two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 to emit red light, the side surfaces 534A to 534C are caused to emit red light, and the two-color LEDs 534A1 corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the 4-round execution gates. Each side 534A-534C is caused to emit blue light by causing -534C1 to emit blue light. Then, based on the execution gate information of the command for the round game execution gate, the MPU 92 does not emit light from the two-color LEDs 534A1 to 534C1 corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate. Side surfaces 534A to 534C are made not to emit light.

In the example of FIG. 76, the MPU 62 sets the hole 533A as a 4-round execution gate and the hole 533C as a 16-round execution gate. Therefore, the MPU 92 causes the two-color light emitting LED 534A1 corresponding to the hole 533A set for the 4-round execution gate to emit blue light, thereby causing the side surface 534A to emit blue light, and the hole 534A set for the 16-round execution gate. The two-color LED 534C1 corresponding to 533C emits red light, thereby causing the side surface 534C to emit red light.
Also, in the example of FIG. 76, the MPU 62 sets the hole 533B as the replay gate. Therefore, the MPU 92 prevents the side surface 534B from emitting light by preventing the two-color light emitting LED 534B1 corresponding to the hole 533B set in the replay gate from emitting light.

In the execution gate finalization effect, the MPU 102 displays a schematic diagram SD of the croon 53E viewed from above in the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, as shown in FIG. 76(A). Then, the MPU 102, based on the execution gate information of the execution gate confirmation effect command, creates a schematic diagram SD corresponding to each side surface 534A to 534C of the rune 53E corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the 16-round execution gate. The areas are displayed in red, and the areas of the schematic diagram SD corresponding to the sides 534A to 534C of the croon 53E corresponding to the holes 533A to 533C set in the 4-round execution gates are displayed in blue. In addition, based on the execution gate information of the execution gate confirmation effect command, the MPU 102 selects the area of the schematic diagram SD corresponding to each side surface 534A to 534C of the rune 53E corresponding to each hole 533A to 533C set in the replay gate. Displayed in white. In addition, the MPU 102 displays the line of the angel "Red is 16R, blue is 4R!" on the lower right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, so that each hole 533A corresponding to the red area is displayed. 533C is a 16-round running gate, suggesting to the player that each hole 533A-533C corresponding to the blue area is a 4-round running gate.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the holes 533A to 533C set in the 16-round execution gate and the holes 533A-533C set in the 4-round execution gate enter the game ball that entered the clown 53E. It functions as a specific ball entry section that controls a round game based on the entry of a game ball. In addition, each of the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate allows the game ball that has entered the croon 53E to enter, and is different from the control of the round game by the specific ball entering section. It functions as a non-specific ball entry section that controls the round game based on it.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the non-specific ball-entering section is set so as not to shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, and the specific ball-entering section It is set to shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball.
Further, in the present embodiment, the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate execute payout of game balls based on the entry of game balls. In the present embodiment, the holes 533A to 533C set in the replay gate execute payout of game balls based on the entry of game balls, but the payout of game balls may not be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 executes a re-lottery to select 4 round games and 16 round games when the game ball enters the non-specified ball entering portion, thereby The 4-round game and 16-round game to be started when the game ball enters the ball section are reset.
In this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes a re-lottery to select 4 round games and 16 round games when the game ball enters the non-specified ball entering portion, so that the non-specified The ball entry section controls the round game based on the entry of the game ball so as to be different from the control of the round game by the specific ball entry section, but may perform control different from the re-lottery, for example , a special effect may be executed at the time of the round game. In short, the non-specific ball entering section may control the round game based on the entering ball of the game ball so as to be different from the control of the round game by the specific ball entering section.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same effects and effects as those of the seventh embodiment, the following effects and effects can be achieved.
(1) The main controller 60 executes a re-lottery to select the first specific game and the second specific game when the game ball enters the non-specific ball entering part, so that the specific ball entering part Since the first specific game and the second specific game to be started when the game ball is entered are reset, the player can set the first specific game and the second specific game by entering the game ball into the non-specific ball entry section. The result of the lottery for selecting the second specific game can be changed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In this embodiment, the non-specific ball-entering section is set so as not to shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, and the specific ball-entering section Although it is set to shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, the opposite relationship may be set. Specifically, the specific ball entry section is set so as not to shift the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, and the non-specific ball entry section is the game ball entry. The non-electric accessory 51 may be set to shift from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the ball.
According to this, the non-specific ball entry section shifts the non-electric accessory 51 from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. By entering a ball, a round game can be started without entering a game ball into a specific ball entering section. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

[Modification of each embodiment]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and includes modifications, improvements, etc. within the scope of achieving the object of the present invention.
(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes opening and closing of the big winning hole 38a once per round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may open and close the big winning opening 38a a plurality of times for one round game.
(2) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then the predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, or the game to the big winning opening 38a When the total winning number of balls reaches a predetermined upper limit number, the door 38b is closed again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may be changed according to the upper limit duration time, and the condition for setting the open/close door 38b to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches eight, which is the predetermined upper limit number. Thus, the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit number to any number other than eight. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set different upper limit numbers according to the distribution result. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set different upper limit numbers for each round in one open/close execution mode.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes when the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state. The door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an end trigger port for setting the opening/closing door 38b to a closed state based on the entry of a game ball, and when a predetermined time elapses, this end trigger It may be configured to allow the ball to enter the mouth.
(5) In each of the above-described embodiments, after the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, and the opening/closing door 38b is closed again. was set to On the other hand, for example, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 opens the opening/closing door 38b when a predetermined time elapses from the time when the winning to the big winning opening 38a occurs. It may be set to the closed state again.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state. On the other hand, for example, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 may shift to the next round game without setting the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again.
(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the upper limit duration of the short time mode is set shorter than the game ball launch cycle. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is a time equal to or longer than the firing cycle of the game ball and less than or equal to n times (n=1, 2, or 3) the firing cycle of the game ball. It may be set to time.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of open/close execution modes. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has an opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is executed twice with the upper limit duration of the short-time mode, and an opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is executed 4 times or 16 times with the upper limit duration of the long-time mode. and had a mode. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening and closing execution mode different from these regarding the form of the upper limit duration time and the number of round game executions. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 differs in the mode of the upper limit duration time, instead of setting a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes, by varying the degree of opening of the opening/closing door 38b, such as half-opening or full-opening. , a configuration in which a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes are set. Furthermore, the form of the upper limit duration may be set so that the exact form of the upper limit duration is different, although the form appears to be the same from the player's point of view.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the game result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode are set in advance so as to correspond one-to-one. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode may be set by randomly selecting from a plurality of types of effects without corresponding to the game result, or may be selected from a plurality of types of effects by lottery or the like. , and the selection rate may be changed according to the game result.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 92 is effective when the game result is any of the "special loss result", "non-explicit small round high probability result", and "explicit small round high probability result" Information relating to a special combination of symbols is determined as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the line L, and this special combination of symbols is the same regardless of the type of game result. On the other hand, the MPU 92 may randomly determine the information related to the stop result so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the game result.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the jackpot generation lottery, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the jackpot type lottery when the jackpot is generated. On the other hand, when a big win occurs, the MPU 62 may use the big win random number counter C1 for the lottery for the type of the big win. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM64.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of loss results, ie, the "special loss result" and the "normal loss result", and the MPU 62 stores the value of the random number that wins the jackpot. A lottery for generating a big hit is executed by comparing the success/failure table and the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. In other words, the MPU 62 used the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 to execute the lottery for the "special losing result". On the other hand, the MPU 62 uses a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to execute the lottery related to the "special loss result". A lottery related to "result" may be executed.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, the value of the random number that becomes the "special loss result" is two, and the occurrence of the big win. Under the game state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery of (1), the value of the random number that becomes the "special loss result" is one. In other words, the probability of a "special failure result" is set to be higher in the low-probability mode than in the high-probability mode. On the other hand, the probability of becoming a "special outlier result" may be set lower in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode, and set to be the same in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. may have been Also, the probability of the "special failure result" may be set to 0 in at least one of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode.

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 creates advantageous game states and disadvantageous game states for the player by setting the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode. By setting the states, the player may create favorable and unfavorable playing states. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player by varying the number of game rounds for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player depending on whether or not to shift to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by varying the number of game rounds in which the high-probability mode is continued after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the reservation information related to the upper working opening 36 in the first result display section reservation area Ra, and stores the reservation information related to the lower working opening 37 in the second result display section. By storing in the reserved area Rb, the reserved information regarding the upper working port 36 and the reserved information regarding the lower working port 37 are separately stored. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may store the hold information relating to the upper working opening 36 and the holding information relating to the lower working opening 37 together.
(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 preferentially sets the reservation information related to the lower operation opening 37 for completing the game round regardless of whether or not there is the reservation information related to the upper operation opening 36. . On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set the reservation information related to the upper operation port 36 and the reservation information related to the lower operation port 37 for completion of the game cycle in the winning order of the respective reservation information.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the main controller 60 transmits a command to the audio light emission control device 90, and the audio light emission control device 90 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the display control device 100. The control of the display control device 100 was executed by. In response to this, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the sound emission control device 90, thereby performing sound emission control. Control of device 90 may be performed. The commands sent from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 and the commands sent from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in the above embodiments, and are arbitrary. .
(18) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is the main control device. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 60 .

(19) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. Then, by starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game cycle is executed on the display screen G.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the effect for the game round is not limited to the effect described in each of the above embodiments, and is arbitrary. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for a game round by operating a combination of a movable decorative member provided on the game board 31 and the symbol display device 47 . Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for a game round by operating a combination of light-emitting means provided on the game board 31 and the symbol display device 47 . Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute a game round effect by combining these decorative members and light emitting means with the pattern display device 47 to operate.

(20) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes an internal lottery (win/fail lottery and sorting lottery) based on the winning to the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37, and then the main display section 45 And the symbol display device 47 executes the variable display, and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 as a result of stopping the variable display. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the pattern display device 47 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after the start of the variable display may display the results of In this case, after starting the variable display, before stopping the variable display, an internal lottery may be executed and the stop result and the like may be set.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the main display unit 45, and the main display unit 45 executes the variable display of the pattern and displays the result of the internal lottery as a result of stopping the variable display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 may display the same stop result as the stop result of the variable display regardless of the result of the internal lottery. The result of the lottery may be made unidentifiable. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to include the main display section 45 .

(22) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. Then, by starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game cycle is executed on the display screen G.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the symbol display device 47 may execute an effect for the game round on the display screen G by displaying a symbol (design) that indicates the result of the internal lottery.

For example, the pattern display device 47 displays a predetermined area in at least one of an area narrower than the area for displaying the patterns of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 and a peripheral area of the area for displaying the patterns of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped, a symbol indicating the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in the predetermined area. The symbols to be displayed in the predetermined area may be variably displayed or may not be displayed during the variably displayed symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, the pattern displayed in the predetermined area may employ letters, colors, or patterns that are difficult for the player to distinguish, or may employ a combination of these. In addition, even if characters, colors, and patterns that are difficult for the player to identify are not used, mutually similar patterns or combinations thereof may be used to make it difficult for the player to identify. According to this, the administrator of the game parlor, for example, looks at the pattern display device 47 without looking at the main display section 45 at the end of the game round, in the same way as in the case of winning a big win lottery. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is being performed to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the behavior of .

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 was configured to operate independently, but it may be configured to transmit and receive information by interlocking with an external device such as a mobile phone. . For example, a game machine is configured so that an optical code can be output by a player operating a button or the like provided on the game machine, and information on the optical code is transmitted to a camera provided on a mobile phone or the like. The game machine may be configured so that the information of the game machine can be sent to the web server by taking an image with the , reading it, and accessing the website. In addition, the gaming machine is configured so that the information of the web server can be received by the player accessing the website and entering the password issued by operating the button etc. provided on the gaming machine into the gaming machine. You may

(24) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been exemplified and explained as the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be a pachinko machine of another type different from the pachinko machine 10. For example, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured such that when a game ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens an electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Also, the gaming machine of the present invention may be an arrangement ball machine or other type of gaming machine such as a mahjong game machine.

(25) In each of the above embodiments, the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 introduces the game ball flowing down the game area into the inside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and then guides it to the crew 53, and the right side By switching the discharge route discharged to the outside of the variable ball entry mechanism 52, it has a function of guiding the game ball entered inside the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 to the crew route or the discharge route. On the other hand, for example, the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 causes the game ball flowing down the game area to enter the inside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and then discharges the execution gate route that guides it to the 4th round execution gate. You may have it in place of the route.

FIG. 77 is a front view of a game board according to a modification of the invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 includes the right variable ball entry mechanism 52, and the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 causes the game ball flowing down the game area to enter the inside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52. Afterwards, it has a crew route that guides it to the crew 53 and a discharge route that discharges it to the outside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 .
On the other hand, in this modification, the game board 31 is provided with a right variable ball entry mechanism 52H, as shown in FIG. It is different from the first embodiment in that it has a crun route that guides the ball to the crun 53 after entering the ball mechanism 52H and an execution gate route that guides it to the 4 round execution gate 524H.

FIG. 78 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the right variable ball entry mechanism.
The right variable ball entry mechanism 52H has substantially the same configuration as the right variable ball entry mechanism 52 in the first embodiment, and as shown in FIG. , a guide passage 522 for guiding the game ball guided to the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H by the introduction portion 521, and the destination of the game ball guided by the guide passage 522. and a 4-round execution gate 524H and a guide rail 525 (see FIG. 4) provided at the guide destination of the guide passage 522 . In addition, the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H has an on-off valve 526 provided in the guide passage 522 .

The introduction part 521 includes a blade member 521a provided on the game board 31 so as to close an entrance formed on the right side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H, and a blade member centering on an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. A pin 521b that rotatably supports the blade 521a and a blade member driving portion 521c that drives the blade member 521a are provided.

The blade member 521a rotates counterclockwise around the pin 521b, thereby switching between a closed state (a chain line in the figure) in which the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H is closed, and a clockwise rotation around the pin 521b. By moving, it has an open state (solid line in the drawing) in which the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H is opened (see the arrow in the drawing). In the open state, the blade member 521a is inclined so as to descend toward the entrance side of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H.
The blade member driving section 521c sets the blade member 521a to either a closed state or an open state by driving the blade member 521a.

In this modification, the blade member 521a allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter based on the result of the internal lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into each of the operation ports 36 and 37. Specifically, the blade member 521a is set to the open state when the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Further, the blade member 521a is set to the closed state when the internal lottery does not win the transition to the open/close execution mode.
In addition, the introduction part 521 may be configured so that the game ball flowing down the game area can enter the inside of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H. The cycle can be set arbitrarily.

Therefore, when the blade member 521a is set to the open state by the blade member driving unit 521c, the game ball travels through the blade member 521a using the inclination of the blade member 521a and enters the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H. (solid line in the figure).
On the other hand, when the blade member 521a is set to the closed state by the blade member driving section 521c, the game ball does not enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H (chain line in the figure).

Thus, in this modified example, each operating port 36, 37 enables the game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and functions as lottery ball entry means for executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters.
Further, in this modification, the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H can enter the game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the lottery ball entry means. It functions as a variable entry means.
In this modified example, the operation ports 36 and 37 are employed as the lottery ball entry means, but the through gate 41 may be employed as the lottery ball entry means, or other ball entry means may be employed. good. In short, the lottery ball entry means should be able to enter a game ball flowing down the game area and execute an internal lottery when the game ball enters.

The guide passage 522 is formed to have a width that does not allow a plurality of game balls to pass through the passage at the same time. In addition, the guide passage 522 branches into two on the way, and has an upstream guide passage 522a positioned upstream of the branch and two downstream guide passages 522b and 522c positioned downstream. .
In addition, the guide passage 522 is formed transparent (or translucent) so that the inside thereof can be visually recognized from the front side.

The upstream guide passage 522a guides the game ball entered into the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H by the introduction portion 521 from the entrance of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H to the branch position of the guide passage 522. The upstream guide passage 522a is inclined downward from the inlet of the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H toward the branch position of the guide passage 522. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the game ball reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 along the upstream guide passage 522a utilizing the inclination of the upstream guide passage 522a.

The downstream guide passage 522b is provided at a position near the branch position of the guide passage 522. As shown in FIG. Further, the downstream guide passage 522b is formed along the vertically downward direction so as to drop the game ball from the branch position of the guide passage 522. As shown in FIG. This downstream guide passage 522b guides the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 along the upstream guide passage 522a to the 4 round execution gate 524H. This 4-round execution gate 524H has the same functions as the holes 533B and 533C of the croon 53, and when a ball enters the 4-round execution gate 524H, the pachinko machine 10 performs 4 rounds of the game. start executing.
The downstream guide passage 522 c is provided at a position far from the branch position of the guide passage 522 . Further, the downstream side guide passage 522c is formed from the branch position of the guide passage 522 to the guide rail 525 for the game ball. The downstream guide passage 522c guides the game ball that reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 along the upstream guide passage 522a to the guide rail 525 (see FIG. 4).

The switching unit 523 supports a plate 523a provided on the game board 31 so as to close the entrance of the downstream guide passage 522c, and the plate 523a rotatably about an axis orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 31. It has a pin 523b and a plate drive section 523c that drives the plate 523a.

The plate 523a rotates clockwise around the pin 523b, thereby closing the inlet of the downstream guide passage 522b (indicated by a two-dot chain line in the figure) and rotating counterclockwise around the pin 523b. As a result, the inlet of the downstream guide passage 522c is closed and the inlet of the downstream guide passage 522b is opened (solid line in the figure). In the closed state, the plate 523a is inclined downward toward the downstream guide passage 522c.
The plate driving section 523c sets the plate 523a to either a closed state or an open state by driving the plate 523a.

Therefore, when the plate 523a is set to the open state by the plate driving portion 523c, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 is guided to the entrance of the downstream guide passage 522b, and then the 4 round execution gate. 524H (solid line in the figure). After that, the game ball enters the 4-round execution gate 524H (execution gate route).
On the other hand, when the plate 523a is set to the closed state by the plate driving portion 523c, the game ball that has reached the branch position of the guide passage 522 is downstream along the plate 523a using the inclination of the plate 523a. After being guided to the entrance of the side guide passage 522c, it is guided to the guide rail 525 (two-dot chain line in the figure). After that, the game ball is guided to the croon 53 through the guide rail 525 (see FIG. 4) (cloon route).

Here, the plate 523a is normally set to an open state (execution gate route) in which game balls are not guided to the crew 53. Then, when the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the opening/closing execution mode is shifted, the plate 523a is set to a closed state (clown route) in which the game ball is guided to the cloon 53.

The on-off valve 526 includes a valve main body 526a provided on the game board 31 so as to close the upstream guide passage 522a, and an on-off valve drive section 526b for driving the valve main body 526a.
The valve main body 526a retreats toward the inside of the game board 31 and is buried in the game board 31, thereby allowing the game ball entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H to pass through, and toward the window panel 22. By moving forward and protruding from the game board 31, it has a closed state in which the game ball entering the right variable ball entering mechanism 52H is not allowed to pass.
The on-off valve driver 526b sets the valve body 526a to either a closed state or an open state by driving the valve body 526a.

Therefore, when the valve main body 526a is set to the open state by the on-off valve driving portion 526b, the game ball reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 along the upstream guide passage 522a.
On the other hand, when the valve main body 526a is set to the closed state by the on-off valve driving portion 526b, the game ball is stationary in the middle of the upstream guide passage 522a in the valve main body 526a and enters a standby state ( solid line in the figure).

Here, when the upstream guide passage 522a stands still in the middle of the upstream guide passage 522a in the valve body 526a and becomes a standby state (when one game ball is stationary in the valve body 526a), A discharge port 522a1 for discharging the subsequent game ball that entered the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H, and a discharge passage for discharging the game ball that entered the discharge port 522a1 to the game area through the opening 311 (see FIG. 77) 522a2.

The discharge port 522a1 is formed in the game board 31 from the valve main body 526a of the on-off valve 526 toward the blade member 521a side of the introduction portion 521 at a distance of one game ball. When the valve main body 526a is stationary in the middle of the upstream guide passage 522a and is in a standby state, the subsequent game ball entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H comes into contact with the game ball in the standby state. Then, the ball enters the outlet 522a1.
In addition, the upstream guide passage 522a may have an inclined surface that is slightly inclined toward the discharge port 522a1 in order to make it easier for the game ball to enter the discharge port 522a1.

As shown in FIG. 77, the discharge passage 522a2 merges with the discharge passage 536 of the croon 53 above the opening 311, and discharges the game ball through the opening 311 into the game area.
In this way, the on-off valve 526 is configured so as not to stop two or more game balls in the valve body 526a.

Thus, in this modification, the on-off valve 526 has an open state in which a game ball that has entered the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H passes and a closed state in which it does not pass, and switches between the open state and the closed state. there is
In addition, in this modification, the plate 523a has a first route (execution gate route) for guiding the game ball that has passed through the on-off valve 526 to the downstream guide passage 522b (first flow path), and a downstream guide passage It has a second route (clown route) that guides to a downstream guide passage 522c (second flow path) different from 522b, and functions as a route switching valve that switches between the first route and the second route. there is

Here, the crew 53 has a hole 533A (16 round execution gate) for starting execution of 16 round games, and holes 533B and 533C (4 round execution gates) for starting execution of 4 round games. As such, it can give the player a higher value compared to the 4-round execution gate 524H. In other words, a crun route can give a player more value compared to an execution gate route.
Therefore, in this modification, the execution gate route gives a predetermined value to the player by guiding the game ball to the downstream guide passage 522b, and the crew route guides the game ball to the downstream guide passage 522c. This gives the player a higher value than the execution gate route.

It should be noted that, in this modification, the crun route gives the player a higher value than the execution gate route by increasing the number of executions of the round game, but for example, increasing the payout of game balls, A higher value than the execution gate route may be given to the player by executing a special effect or the like.
In short, the second route should give the player a higher value than the first route by guiding the game ball to the second flow path.

In addition, the croon 53 is provided with a rolling surface 531 for rolling the game ball that has entered the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H, and the rolling surface 531, and the game ball that rolls on the rolling surface 531 is entered. Since it has holes 533A to 533C that allow the execution gate route to guide the game ball to the downstream side guide passage 522b, the game ball is given value to the player over a predetermined period of time. By guiding the game ball to the downstream guide passage 522c, the value is given to the player over a longer period of time than the execution gate route.

In addition, in this modification, the crew route gives value to the player by guiding the game ball to the rolling surface 531 of the crew 53 over a longer period of time than the execution gate route. Alternatively, the value may be given to the player by guiding the game ball to a different role, executing a special effect, or the like, taking a longer time than the execution gate route.
In short, the second route may give value to the player for a longer time than the first route by guiding the game ball to the second flow path.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a timing chart of opening and closing of the blade member, the valve main body, and the plate when shifting to the opening and closing execution mode. More specifically, FIG. 79(A) is a timing chart showing a combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result, and FIG. It is a timing chart in the case of a combination of symbols having .
As described above, the blade member 521a is set to the open state when the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

The blade member 521a wins the internal lottery to shift to the opening/closing execution mode, and when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, as shown in FIG. When 10 seconds have elapsed after shifting to the mode, the open state and the closed state are repeatedly set at a predetermined cycle. In other words, the blade member 521a intermittently opens and closes at a predetermined cycle.

Further, when the blade member 521a wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in the internal lottery and the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, as shown in FIG. 79(B), When 15 seconds have elapsed after shifting to the open/close execution mode, the open state and the closed state are repeatedly set at a predetermined cycle. In other words, the blade member 521a intermittently opens and closes at a predetermined cycle.

In this modification, the blade member 521a is repeatedly set to the closed state for 1 sec and the open state for 0.5 sec. Further, the blade member 521a is installed in the open state a total of three times. Therefore, the blade member 521a intermittently opens and closes at a cycle of 1.5 sec, and the period from the start of the first open state to the end of the third open state is 3.5 sec.
When the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 102 displays the angel's words "Right-handed, aim for the croon!" Suggesting a player to hit to the right.

Also, the valve body 526a is set to the open state for 0.5 sec when 15 sec and 25 sec have elapsed after shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, the open/close valve 526 is set to the open state for 0.5 sec twice after shifting to the open/close execution mode.
Then, the plate 523a is set to the closed state for 10 seconds when 20 seconds have passed after shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

When the internal lottery wins the transition to the open/close execution mode and the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the MPU 62 switches to the execution gate entry possible state. In the execution gate ball entry possible state, the blade member 521a is repeatedly set to the open state and the closed state at a predetermined cycle when 10 seconds have passed after shifting to the open/close execution mode, as shown in FIG. 79(A). Therefore, the game ball entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H through the open blade member 521a reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 when the valve main body 526a is opened for the first time, and the plate 523a in the open state. After being guided to the entrance of the downstream guide passage 522b at , it is guided to the 4th round execution gate 524H. After that, the game ball enters the 4-round execution gate 524H (execution gate route).

On the other hand, when the internal lottery wins the transition to the open/close execution mode and the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the MPU 62 switches to the crew entry possible state. In the crew-enterable state, as shown in FIG. 79B, the blade member 521a is repeatedly set to the open state and the closed state at a predetermined cycle when 15 seconds have elapsed after shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the game ball entering the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H through the open blade member 521a reaches the branch position of the guide passage 522 when the valve body 526a is opened for the second time, and reaches the closed plate 523a. After being guided to the entrance of the downstream side guide passage 522c, it is guided to the guide rail 525. As shown in FIG. After that, the game ball is guided to the crew 53 via the guide rail 525 (cruun route).

In addition, in this modification, when the game ball does not enter the right variable ball entry mechanism 52H through the open blade member 521a in the execution gate entry possible state or the crew entry possible state, the MPU 62 , the game in the open/close execution mode is ended and the game is shifted to the normal state. For example, the timing chart shown in FIG. 79A may be repeated, or other timing charts may be repeated. .

Thus, in this modification, the MPU 62 is based on the result (stop result) of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into each of the operation ports 36, 37, the execution gate ball entry possible state and the crew It functions as a ball entry possible state switching means for switching the ball entry possible state.
In addition, in this modification, the MPU 62 switches between the execution gate entry possible state and the crew entry possible state based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into each of the operation ports 36 and 37. However, for example, based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the through gate 41, the execution gate entry possible state and the crew entry possible state may be switched, and the non-motorized role The execution gate entry possible state and the crew entry possible state may be switched based on the open state of the object 51, and the execution gate entry possible state and the crew entry possible state may be switched based on other information. good.
In short, the ball entry possible state switching means should switch between the execution gate ball entry possible state and the crew entry possible state.

In addition, in this modification, the MPU 62 sets the game ball flowing down the game area so as to pass through the on-off valve 526 when it is switched to the execution gate route by the plate 523a. A possible state (first ball entry possible state) and a crew entry that sets the game ball flowing down the game area so as to pass through the on-off valve 526 when switched to the crew root at the plate 523a can be entered. It is switched to a ball possible state (second ball entry possible state).
In this modified example, the MPU 62 switches between the first ball-enterable state and the second ball-enterable state based on the timing chart shown in FIG. A timing chart other than this may be adopted as long as it is possible to switch between the state and the second ball-enterable state.

According to this modified example, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The MPU 62 switches between the execution gate entry possible state and the crew entry possible state. The game ball that flows down the game area is set to be able to enter, and the croon ball entry possible state is the game that flows down the game area so as to pass through the on-off valve 526 when the plate 523a is switched to the croon route. The ball is set to be able to enter. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the timing of switching the on-off valve 526 to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the player's attention to the game.

(2) The MPU 62 switches between the execution gate ball entry possible state and the crew entry ball entry possible state based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into each of the operation ports 36 and 37. will pay attention to the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into each operation port 36,37. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(3) Since the crun route gives the player a higher value than the execution gate route by guiding the game ball to the downstream guide passage 522c, the player can switch to the crun ball entry possible state with the MPU 62. I would expect that. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(4) The execution gate route guides the game ball to the downstream guide passage 522b to give value to the player over a predetermined period of time, and the crew route guides the game ball to the downstream guide passage 522c. As a result, the value is awarded to the player over a longer period of time than the execution gate route, so that the player can proceed to the next game with ease when switching to the execution gate route at the plate 523a. When switched to the Kroon route, the game can be thoroughly enjoyed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.
(5) Since the crew route guides the game ball to the rolling surface 531 of the crew 53 by guiding the game ball to the downstream guide passage 522c, it takes a longer time for the player than the downstream guide passage 522b. A value can be given, and the player pays attention to the destination of the game ball entering the right variable ball entering mechanism 52H. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

[Group of Inventions Extracted from Each Embodiment]
The features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above embodiments will be described below. Of the features of the group of inventions, the corresponding configurations in each of the above-described embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the group of inventions are not limited to the above-described embodiments, and the features of the group of inventions. Modifications, improvements, etc., and combinations of features within the range that can achieve the purpose are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Identification advantageous to the player based on the starting ball entry means to be executed (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) and the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state to a control state,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and from the open state to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball into itself. Opening and closing ball entry means (non-electric accessory 51) that shifts to
A variable ball entry means (clone 53) that allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. ,
The variable ball entry means is
A first ball-entering portion (holes 533B, 533C) that allows a game ball entering the variable ball-entering means to enter, and does not shift the opening/closing ball-entering means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. )When,
a second ball-entering portion (hole 533A) that allows the game ball entering the variable ball-entering means to enter, and shifts the opening/closing ball-entering means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball; with
The game state transition means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state, the specific control state when the game ball enters any one of the opening and closing ball entering means, the first ball entering section, and the second ball entering section. A gaming machine characterized by comprising specific control starting means (game state transition processing) for starting a game of.

According to feature A1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. The variable ball entry means is provided with a first ball entry section and a second ball entry section for starting a game in a specific control state when a game ball is entered. After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transfer means, the game in the specific control state is started by entering the game ball into the first ball entry section or the second ball entry section. can be done. In addition, the second ball-entering unit shifts the opening/closing ball-entering means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, so that the player can change the game state by the game state transition means for the next specific control. After shifting to the state, the game in the specific control state can be started by entering the game ball into the opening/closing ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in feature A1 of the invention group,
The game in the specific control state that is started when a game ball enters the opening/closing ball entering means and the second ball entering portion is the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion. A game machine characterized by giving a player a higher value than a game in a controlled state.

According to feature A2 of the group of the present invention, the game in the specific control state that is started when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means and the second ball entry part is the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry part. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts with the ball, the player can enter the game ball in the variable ball entry means, so that when starting the game in the specific control state , expects the ball to enter the second ball-entering section. Further, when the open/close ball-entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball-entering portion, the player changes the game state to the next game state by the game state shifting means. After shifting to the specific control state of (1), the game ball is entered into the opening/closing ball entry means, thereby playing a game with a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entry section. A game in a specific control state given to a person can be started. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in feature A2 of the invention group,
The specific control starting means starts a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be put out when the game ball enters the first ball entering section, and the opening and closing ball entering means and the second ball entering section start the game. By starting the game in the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be put out when the game balls enter the ball entering portion, the number of game balls entering the first ball entering portion is increased. A gaming machine characterized by giving a player a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts when a ball is entered.

According to feature A3 of the present invention group, the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry section can start a game in a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the opening and closing ball entry means and Entry of game balls into the second ball entry part is achieved by starting a game in a specific control state in which more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be put out, thereby allowing game balls to enter the first ball entry part. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts when the ball is entered, the player, when starting the game in the specific control state, does not enter the second ball entry section. will expect. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine described in feature A3 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The specific control starting means is
After the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again, one game in the specific control state (round game) is set, and the number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to a predetermined number. By doing so, a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started, and by setting the opening/closing number of times of the opening/closing ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of game balls is set. A game machine characterized by starting a game in the specific control state in which a larger number of game balls can be paid out.

According to feature A4 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means sets the opening/closing number of opening/closing ball entry means to a prescribed number of times when the game ball is entered into the first ball entry section. A game in a specific control state in which balls can be put out is started, and the opening/closing number of opening/closing ball entry means is set to a number greater than a predetermined number when a game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means and the second ball entry section. As a result, a game in a specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be put out is started. I will expect the ball of. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entry means
A croon (croon 53) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball entered by the variable ball entry means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion are provided on the rolling surface and enter a game ball rolling on the rolling surface.

According to feature A5 of the present invention group, the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion are provided on the rolling surface of the croon. Pay attention to where the ball is going. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5 of the invention group,
The opening and closing ball entry means includes:
a first receiving portion (each plate-shaped body 513) that receives a game ball that has entered the opening and closing ball entry means;
A second receiving portion (each lower blade member 515) that receives a game ball that has entered the second ball entering portion,
By receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, the state is shifted from the open state to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball at the second receiving portion, the state is shifted from the closed state to the open state. Amusement machine.

According to feature A6 of the present invention group, the opening/closing ball entry means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, and receives the game ball at the second receiving portion. , the closed state is shifted to the open state, so that the open/closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6 of the invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
Equipped with a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37),
The game machine is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part;
and the opening and closing ball entry means arranged on the first path,
The game state transition means is
a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
a second gaming state (high-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes internal lottery for a predetermined number of times, and then switches to the second game state. to the first game state.

According to feature A7 of the present invention group, after the player finishes playing the game in the specific control state, until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (until switching from the second game state to the first game state b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering a game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering part via the second route, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering part through the first route. By doing so, an internal lottery can be performed. Therefore, when the opening/closing ball-entering means is arranged on the first path, the player must wait until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the opening/closing ball-entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state. If the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball will enter the open/close ball entering means via the first path. In this case, the open/close ball-entering means shifts from the open state to the closed state, so the player must shift the game state to the specific control state before the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. The game can be played in the hope that the player will

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6 of the invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
Equipped with a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37),
The game machine is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part;
said opening and closing ball-entering means arranged on a third path (weakening strike route) different from said first path and said second path;
The game state transition means is
a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
a second gaming state (high-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes internal lottery for a predetermined number of times, and then switches to the second game state. to the first game state.

According to the feature A8 of the present invention group, after the game in the specific control state is completed, the player can execute the internal lottery for a predetermined number of times (until the second game state is switched to the first game state). b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering a game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering part via the second route, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering part through the first route. By doing so, an internal lottery can be performed. Further, when the opening/closing ball-entering means is arranged on the third path, the player must wait until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the opening/closing ball-entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state. Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball is not entered into the opening/closing ball entering means. In this case, since the open/close ball-entering means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

According to the characteristic group A of the present invention, it is possible to expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game, so that the following problems can be solved. .

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. The gaming machine shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, for example, when winning a jackpot lottery. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, after shifting the game state to the specific control state, the gaming machine follows the same flow to start the game in the specific control state regardless of whether or not the action of the player is intervened. There is a problem that the series of flow from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Identification advantageous to the player based on the starting ball entry means to be executed (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) and the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state to a control state,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and from the open state to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball into itself. Opening and closing ball entry means (non-electric accessory 51) that shifts to
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball to the starting ball entry means, variable ball entry means (clone 53A and first cloon) that allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter 55) and
The variable ball entry means
a ball entry section (holes 533A to 533C, 553A, 553B) for entering the game ball entered by the variable ball entry means;
An opening/closing lottery means (rotating body 537, tray 538, and second crew 56) that executes a lottery related to the opening/closing ball entry means based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry portion,
The game state transition means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state, specific control start means (game state A game machine characterized by comprising transition processing).

According to feature B1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine allows a game ball flowing down the game area to be entered based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. The variable ball entry means is provided with a ball entry section for starting a game in a specific control state when a game ball is entered. After transitioning to the specific control state, the game in the specific control state can be started by entering the game ball into the ball entry section. In addition, since the variable ball entry means is provided with opening/closing lottery means for executing a lottery related to the opening/closing ball entry means based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry portion, for example, the lottery executed by the opening/closing lottery means When the game is won and the opening/closing ball entry means is shifted from the closed state to the open state, the player shifts the game state to the next specific control state by the game state transition means, and then switches to the opening/closing ball entry means. A game in a specific control state can be started by entering a game ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in feature B1 of the invention group,
The variable ball entry means is
Equipped with a plurality of ball-entrance parts including first ball-entrance parts (holes 533B, 533C, 553B) and second ball-entrance parts (holes 533A, 553A),
The game in the specific control state that is started when a game ball enters the opening/closing ball entering means and the second ball entering portion is the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion. A game machine characterized by giving a player a higher value than a game in a controlled state.

According to feature B2 of the group of the present invention, the game in the specific control state that is started when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means and the second ball entry part is the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry part. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts with the ball, the player can enter the game ball in the variable ball entry means, so that when starting the game in the specific control state , expects the ball to enter the second ball-entering section. Further, when winning the lottery executed by the opening/closing lottery means and causing the opening/closing ball entry means to shift from the closed state to the open state, the player uses the game state transition means to specify the next game state. After shifting to the control state, the game ball is entered into the opening/closing ball entry means, thereby providing the player with a higher value than the game in the specific control state started when the game ball enters the first ball entry section. A game in the specific control state to be given can be started. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in feature B2 of the invention group,
The specific control starting means starts a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion, and the opening and closing ball entering means and the second ball entering portion start the game. By starting the game in the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be put out when the game balls enter the ball entering portion, the number of game balls entering the first ball entering portion is increased. A gaming machine characterized by giving a player a value higher than that of a game in the specific control state that starts when a ball is entered.

According to feature B3 of the present invention group, the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry portion can start a game in a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the opening and closing ball entry means and Entry of game balls into the second ball entry part is achieved by starting a game in a specific control state in which more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be put out, thereby allowing game balls to enter the first ball entry part. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts when the ball is entered, the player, when starting the game in the specific control state, does not enter the second ball entry section. will expect. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in feature B3 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball is entered. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The specific control starting means is
After the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again, one game in the specific control state (round game) is set, and the number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to a predetermined number. By doing so, the game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be put out is started, and the predetermined number of game balls is set by setting the opening/closing number of times of the opening/closing ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times. A game machine characterized by starting a game in the specific control state in which a larger number of game balls can be paid out.

According to feature B4 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means sets the opening/closing count of the opening/closing ball entry means to a prescribed number of times when the game ball enters the first ball entry section, thereby making it possible to play a predetermined number of games. A game in a specific control state in which balls can be put out is started, and when a game ball enters the opening/closing ball entering means and the second ball entering section, the number of times of opening/closing the opening/closing ball entering means is set to a number greater than a predetermined number of times. As a result, a game in a specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be put out is started. I will expect the ball of. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B2 to feature B4 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entry means is
A croon (croon 53A and first croon 55) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball entered by the variable ball entry means,
A gaming machine, wherein the plurality of ball entry portions are provided on the rolling surface and enter a game ball rolling on the rolling surface.

According to feature B5 of the present invention group, since the plurality of ball entry portions are provided on the rolling surface of the croon, the player can pay attention to where the game ball enters the variable ball entry means. Become. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine described in feature B5 of the invention group,
The rolling surface is
The plurality of ball entry portions formed at a predetermined distance from the center of the rolling surface and provided at equal intervals from each other,
The open/close lottery means
A rotating body (rotating body 537) that rotates about an axis passing through the center of the rolling surface and enters the game ball that has entered the plurality of ball entering portions,
The rotating body is
A plurality of rotating body passages (rotating body passages 537C1 to 537C3) formed at positions corresponding to each of the plurality of ball entering portions and guiding game balls that enter the plurality of ball entering portions,
The plurality of rotating body passages are
a first rotating body passage (rotating body passages 537C2, 537C3) that does not shift the opening/closing ball-entering means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of a game ball;
A gaming machine comprising a second rotor passage (rotator passage 537C1) for shifting said opening/closing ball-entering means from a closed state to an open state based on entry of a game ball.

According to feature B6 of the group of inventions, the opening/closing lottery means includes a rotating body that rotates about an axis passing through the center of the rolling surface and that receives the game balls entering the plurality of ball entering portions. The rotating body includes a first rotating body passage that does not shift the opening/closing ball-entering means from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of a game ball, and a state in which the opening/closing ball-entering means is opened from the closed state based on the entry of a game ball. and a second rotating body passage that transitions to the According to this, the open/close lottery means independently moves the open/close ball entry means from the closed state without being affected by the clown having a plurality of ball entry parts for starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball is entered. A lottery can be made as to whether or not to shift to the open state. Further, when the opening/closing ball-entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state by causing the game ball that has entered the plurality of ball-entering portions to enter the second rotor passage of the rotor, the game After shifting the game state to the next specific control state by the game state transition means, the player enters the game ball into the opening and closing ball entering means, thereby entering the game ball into the first ball entering section. It is possible to start a game in a specific control state that gives the player a higher value than the game in the specific control state to start. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine described in feature B5 of the invention group,
The open/close lottery means
A lottery clown (second cloon 56) having a lottery rolling surface (rolling surface 561) for rolling the game ball entered into the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion,
The lottery clone is
A plurality of lottery ball entry portions (holes 563A to 563C) that are provided on the lottery rolling surface and enter game balls rolling on the lottery rolling surface,
The plurality of lottery entry ball sections,
a first lottery ball entry section (holes 563B, 563C) that does not shift the opening/closing ball entry means from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of a game ball;
A gaming machine comprising a second lottery ball entry section (hole 563A) for shifting the opening/closing ball entry means from a closed state to an open state based on entry of a game ball.

According to feature B7 of the present invention group, the opening/closing lottery means includes a first lottery ball entry section that does not shift the opening/closing ball entry means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of a game ball, and the entry of the game ball. A lottery clown provided with a second lottery ball-entering part for shifting the opening/closing ball-entering means from a closed state to an open state based on a ball. According to this, the open/close lottery means is independent without being affected by the clown provided with the first ball-entering section and the second ball-entering section for starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball is entered. A lottery can be made as to whether or not to shift the opening/closing ball-entering means from the closed state to the open state. Further, the game ball entering the first ball entering section and the second ball entering section is entered into the second lottery ball entering section, thereby shifting the open/close ball entering means from the closed state to the open state. In this case, the player shifts the game state to the next specific control state by the game state transition means, and then enters the game ball into the opening/closing ball entering means to enter the first ball entering section. It is possible to start a game in a specific control state that gives the player a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball is entered. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B7 of the present invention group,
The opening and closing ball entry means includes:
a first receiving portion (each plate-shaped body 513) that receives a game ball that has entered the opening and closing ball entry means;
A second receiving portion (each lower blade member 515) that receives a game ball that has entered the second ball entering portion,
By receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, the state is shifted from the open state to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball at the second receiving portion, the state is shifted from the closed state to the open state. Amusement machine.

According to feature B8 of the present invention group, the opening/closing ball entry means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, and receives the game ball at the second receiving portion. , the closed state is shifted to the open state, so that the open/closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

Feature B9.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B8 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
Equipped with a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37),
The game machine is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part;
and the opening and closing ball entry means arranged on the first path,
The game state transition means is
a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
a second gaming state (high-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes internal lottery for a predetermined number of times, and then switches to the second game state. to the first game state.

According to feature B9 of the present invention group, after the player finishes playing the game in the specific control state, until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (until switching from the second game state to the first game state b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering a game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering part via the second route, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering part through the first route. By doing so, an internal lottery can be performed. Therefore, when the opening/closing ball-entering means is arranged on the first path, the player must wait until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the opening/closing ball-entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state. If the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball will enter the open/close ball entering means via the first path. In this case, the open/close ball-entering means shifts from the open state to the closed state, so the player must shift the game state to the specific control state before the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. The game can be played in the hope that the player will

Feature B10.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B8 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
Equipped with a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37),
The game machine is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part;
said opening and closing ball-entering means arranged on a third path (weakening strike route) different from said first path and said second path;
The game state transition means is
a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
a second gaming state (high-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes internal lottery for a predetermined number of times, and then switches to the second game state. to the first game state.

According to feature B10 of the present invention group, after the player finishes playing the game in the specific control state, until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (until switching from the second game state to the first game state b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering a game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering part via the second route, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering part through the first route. By doing so, an internal lottery can be performed. Further, when the opening/closing ball-entering means is arranged on the third path, the player must wait until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the opening/closing ball-entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state. Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball is not entered into the opening/closing ball entering means. In this case, since the open/close ball-entering means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

According to the characteristic group B of the present invention, it is possible to expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game, so that the following problems can be solved. .

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. The gaming machine shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, for example, when winning a jackpot lottery. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, after shifting the game state to the specific control state, the gaming machine follows the same flow to start the game in the specific control state regardless of whether or not the action of the player is intervened. There is a problem that the series of flow from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Identification advantageous to the player based on the starting ball entry means to be executed (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) and the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state to a control state,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and from the open state to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball into itself. Opening and closing ball entry means (non-electric accessory 51) that shifts to
The game ball flowing down the game area can be entered based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, and the opening and closing entry is made based on the entry of the game ball. A variable ball entry means (clone 53C) that shifts the means from a closed state to an open state,
The game state transition means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state, specific control start means (game state transition processing) for starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the open/close ball entry means and the variable ball entry means ) is provided.

According to feature C1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine allows a game ball flowing down the game area to be entered based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. Since the variable ball entry means starts the game in the specific control state when the game ball is entered, the player can switch the game state to the specific control state by the game state transfer means. A game in a specific control state can be started by entering a game ball into the variable ball entry means. Further, when the open/close ball-entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state by entering the game ball into the variable ball-entering means, the player changes the game state to the next game state by the game state shifting means. After shifting to the specific control state, the game in the specific control state can be started by entering the game ball into the opening/closing ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 of the invention group,
The variable ball entry means
A first ball entry part (holes 533B, 533C) and a second ball entry part (hole 533A) for entering the game ball entered by the variable ball entry means,
The game state transition means starts the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion,
The game in the specific control state that is started when a game ball enters the opening/closing ball entering means and the second ball entering portion is the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion. A game machine characterized by giving a player a higher value than a game in a controlled state.

According to the feature C2 of the group of the present invention, the game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means and the second ball entry part is the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry part. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts with the ball, the player can enter the game ball in the variable ball entry means, so that when starting the game in the specific control state , expects the ball to enter the second ball-entering section. Further, when the open/close ball-entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state by entering the game ball into the variable ball-entering means, the player changes the game state to the next game state by the game state shifting means. After shifting to the specific control state, the game ball is entered into the opening/closing ball entry means, whereby the player receives a higher value than the game in the specific control state started when the game ball enters the first ball entry section. It is possible to start a game in a specific control state to be given to. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in feature C2 of the invention group,
The specific control starting means starts a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be put out when the game ball enters the first ball entering section, and the opening and closing ball entering means and the second ball entering section start the game. By starting the game in the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be put out when the game balls enter the ball entering portion, the number of game balls entering the first ball entering portion is increased. A gaming machine characterized by giving a player a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts when a ball is entered.

According to feature C3 of the present invention group, the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry section can start a game in a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, and the opening and closing ball entry means and Entry of game balls into the second ball entry part is achieved by starting a game in a specific control state in which more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be put out, thereby allowing game balls to enter the first ball entry part. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts when the ball is entered, the player, when starting the game in the specific control state, does not enter the second ball entry section. will expect. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in feature C3 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The specific control starting means is
After the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again, one game in the specific control state (round game) is set, and the number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to a predetermined number. By doing so, a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out is started, and by setting the opening/closing number of times of the opening/closing ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of game balls is set. A game machine characterized by starting a game in the specific control state in which a larger number of game balls can be paid out.

According to feature C4 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means sets the opening/closing number of opening/closing ball entry means to a prescribed number of times when the game ball is entered into the first ball entry portion. A game in a specific control state in which balls can be put out is started, and when a game ball enters the opening/closing ball entering means and the second ball entering section, the number of times of opening/closing the opening/closing ball entering means is set to a number greater than a predetermined number of times. As a result, a game in a specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be put out is started. I will expect the ball of. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C4 of the invention group,
The variable ball entry means is
A croon (croon 53C) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball entered by the variable ball entry means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion are provided on the rolling surface and enter a game ball rolling on the rolling surface.

According to feature C5 of the present invention group, the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion are provided on the rolling surface of the croon. Pay attention to where the ball is going. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature C1 to feature C5 of the present invention group,
The opening and closing ball entry means includes:
a first receiving portion (each plate-like body 513) for receiving a game ball entered by the opening/closing ball entry means;
A second receiving portion (each lower blade member 515) that receives a game ball that has entered the second ball entering portion,
By receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, the state is shifted from the open state to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball at the second receiving portion, the state is shifted from the closed state to the open state. Amusement machine.

According to feature C6 of the present invention group, the opening/closing ball entry means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, and receives the game ball at the second receiving portion. , the closed state is shifted to the open state, so that the open/closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
Equipped with a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37),
The game machine is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part;
and the opening and closing ball entry means arranged on the first path,
The game state transition means is
a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
a second gaming state (high-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes internal lottery for a predetermined number of times, and then switches to the second game state. to the first game state.

According to the feature C7 of the present invention group, after the game in the specific control state is completed, the player can execute the internal lottery for a predetermined number of times (until the second game state is switched to the first game state). b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering a game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering part via the second route, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering part through the first route. By doing so, an internal lottery can be performed. Therefore, when the opening/closing ball-entering means is arranged on the first path, the player must wait until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the opening/closing ball-entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state. If the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball will enter the open/close ball entering means via the first path. In this case, the open/close ball-entering means shifts from the open state to the closed state, so the player must shift the game state to the specific control state before the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. The game can be played in the hope that the player will

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
Equipped with a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37),
The game machine is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part;
said opening and closing ball-entering means arranged on a third path (weakening strike route) different from said first path and said second path;
The game state transition means is
a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
a second gaming state (high-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes internal lottery for a predetermined number of times, and then switches to the second game state. to the first game state.

According to feature C8 of the present invention group, after the player finishes playing the game in the specific control state, until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (until switching from the second game state to the first game state b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering a game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering part via the second route, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering part through the first route. By doing so, an internal lottery can be performed. Further, when the opening/closing ball-entering means is arranged on the third path, the player must wait until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the opening/closing ball-entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state. Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball is not entered into the opening/closing ball entering means. In this case, since the open/close ball-entering means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

According to the characteristic group C of the present invention, the options for the player can be expanded and the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved. .

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. The gaming machine shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, for example, when winning a jackpot lottery. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, after shifting the game state to the specific control state, the gaming machine follows the same flow to start the game in the specific control state regardless of whether or not the action of the player is intervened. There is a problem that the series of flow from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Identification advantageous to the player based on the starting ball entry means to be executed (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) and the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state to a control state,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and from the open state to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball into itself. Opening and closing ball entry means (non-electric accessory 57) that shifts to
The game ball flowing down the game area can be entered based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, and the opening and closing entry is made based on the entry of the game ball. A variable ball entry means (Clune 53D) that shifts the means from a closed state to an open state,
The starting ball entry means is
Equipped with a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37),
The game machine is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part;
said opening and closing ball-entering means arranged on a third path (weakening strike route) different from said first path and said second path;
The game state transition means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state, specific control start means (game state transition processing) for starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the open/close ball entry means and the variable ball entry means ) is provided.

According to feature D1 of the group of the present inventions, the gaming machine allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Since the variable ball entry means starts the game in the specific control state when the game ball is entered, the player can switch the game state to the specific control state by the game state transfer means. A game in a specific control state can be started by entering a game ball into the variable ball entry means. Further, when the open/close ball-entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state by entering the game ball into the variable ball-entering means, the player changes the game state to the next game state by the game state shifting means. After shifting to the specific control state, the game in the specific control state can be started by entering the game ball into the opening/closing ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game. In addition, since the opening/closing ball entry means is disposed on the third path, the player can enter the opening/closing by causing the starting ball entry means to shoot the game ball through a path different from the case where the game ball is entered. A game ball can be entered into the ball means. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play games comfortably.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 of the invention group,
The game state transition means is
a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
a second gaming state (high-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes internal lottery for a predetermined number of times, and then switches to the second game state. to the first game state.

According to the feature D2 of the present invention group, after the game in the specific control state is completed, the player can perform the internal lottery for a predetermined number of times (until the second game state is switched to the first game state). b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering a game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering part via the second route, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering part through the first route. By doing so, an internal lottery can be performed. In addition, since the opening/closing ball-entering means is arranged on the third path, the player can change the opening/closing ball-entering means from the closed state to the open state until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball is not entered into the opening/closing ball entering means. Therefore, since the opening/closing ball-entering means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, the player can play the game without worry.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 or feature D2 of the invention group,
The variable ball entry means is
A first ball entry part (holes 533B, 533C) and a second ball entry part (hole 533A) for entering the game ball entered by the variable ball entry means,
The specific control starting means starts the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion,
The game in the specific control state that is started when a game ball enters the opening/closing ball entering means and the second ball entering portion is the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion. A game machine characterized by giving a player a higher value than a game in a controlled state.

According to feature D3 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state that is started when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means and the second ball entry part is the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry part. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts with the ball, the player can enter the game ball in the variable ball entry means, so that when starting the game in the specific control state , expects the ball to enter the second ball-entering section. Further, when the open/close ball-entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state by entering the game ball into the variable ball-entering means, the player changes the game state to the next game state by the game state shifting means. After shifting to the specific control state, the game ball is entered into the opening/closing ball entry means, whereby the player receives a higher value than the game in the specific control state started when the game ball enters the first ball entry section. It is possible to start a game in a specific control state to be given to. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in feature D3 of the invention group,
The specific control starting means starts a game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion, and the opening and closing ball entering means and the second ball entering portion start the game. By starting the game in the specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be put out when the game balls enter the ball entering portion, the number of game balls entering the first ball entering portion is increased. A gaming machine characterized by giving a player a value higher than that of a game in the specific control state that starts when a ball is entered.

According to feature D4 of the present invention group, entry of a game ball into the second ball entry section can start a game in a specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, opening and closing ball entry means and Entry of game balls into the second ball entry part is achieved by starting a game in a specific control state in which more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be put out, thereby allowing game balls to enter the first ball entry part. Since the player is given a higher value than the game in the specific control state that starts when the ball is entered, the player, when starting the game in the specific control state, does not enter the second ball entry section. will expect. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in feature D4 of the present invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball is entered. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The specific control starting means is
After the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again, one game in the specific control state (round game) is set, and the number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to a predetermined number. By doing so, the game in the specific control state in which a predetermined number of game balls can be put out is started, and the predetermined number of game balls is set by setting the opening/closing number of times of the opening/closing ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times. A game machine characterized by starting a game in the specific control state in which a larger number of game balls can be paid out.

According to feature D5 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means sets the opening/closing number of opening/closing ball entry means to a prescribed number of times when the game ball is entered into the first ball entry portion. A game in a specific control state in which balls can be put out is started, and when a game ball enters the opening/closing ball entering means and the second ball entering section, the number of times of opening/closing the opening/closing ball entering means is set to a number greater than a predetermined number of times. As a result, a game in a specific control state in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be put out is started. I will expect the ball of. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features D3 to D5 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entry means is
A croon (croon 53D) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion are provided on the rolling surface and enter a game ball rolling on the rolling surface.

According to feature D6 of the present invention group, the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion are provided on the rolling surface of the croon. Pay attention to where the ball is going. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8 of the present invention group,
The opening and closing ball entry means includes:
A first receiving portion (each blade member 571) that receives a game ball that has entered the opening and closing ball entry means;
A second receiving portion (second arm portion 576C) that receives a game ball that has entered the second ball entering portion,
By receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, the state is shifted from the open state to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball at the second receiving portion, the state is shifted from the closed state to the open state. Amusement machine.

According to feature D7 of the present invention group, the opening/closing ball entry means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, and receives the game ball at the second receiving portion. , the closed state is shifted to the open state, so that the open/closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

According to the characteristic group D of the present invention, it is possible to expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game, so that the following problems can be solved. .

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. The gaming machine shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, for example, when winning a jackpot lottery. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, after shifting the game state to the specific control state, the gaming machine follows the same flow to start the game in the specific control state regardless of whether or not the action of the player is intervened. There is a problem that the series of flow from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Identification advantageous to the player based on the starting ball entry means to be executed (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) and the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state to a control state,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and from the open state to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball into itself. Opening and closing ball entry means (non-electric accessory 51) that shifts to
A variable ball entry means (clone 53E) that allows the game ball flowing down the game area to be entered based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. ,
The variable ball entry means is
A first ball-entering portion (holes 533B, 533C) that allows a game ball entering the variable ball-entering means to enter, and does not shift the opening/closing ball-entering means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. )When,
a second ball-entering portion (hole 533A) that allows the game ball entering the variable ball-entering means to enter, and shifts the opening/closing ball-entering means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball; with
The game state transition means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state, the specific control state when the game ball enters any one of the opening and closing ball entering means, the first ball entering section, and the second ball entering section. Equipped with specific control start means (game state transition processing) for starting the game of
The game in the specific control state is
A first specific game (4 round games);
A second specific game (16 round games) that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game,
The specific control starting means starts either the first specific game or the second specific game when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion. A game machine characterized by

According to feature E1 of the group of the present invention, the gaming machine can enter a game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. The variable ball entry means is provided with a first ball entry section and a second ball entry section for starting a game in a specific control state when a game ball is entered. After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the game in the specific control state is started by entering the game ball into the first ball entry section or the second ball entry section. can be done. In addition, the second ball-entering unit shifts the opening/closing ball-entering means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, so that the player can change the game state by the game state transition means for the next specific control. After shifting to the state, the game in the specific control state can be started by entering a game ball into the opening/closing ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, the game in the specific control state includes a first specific game and a second specific game that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game, and the specific control start means is the first input. Since either the first specific game or the second specific game is started when the game ball enters the ball part and the second ball entering part, the player enters the game ball into the variable ball entering means. If a game in a specific control state is to be started by starting the second specific game, the start of the second specific game is expected. Therefore, the gaming machine can further increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine described in feature E1 of the invention group,
A game machine, wherein the game in the specific control state started when a game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means is the second specific game.

According to feature E2 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means is the second specific game, so the game ball enters the second ball entry section. When the opening/closing ball-entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state based on the ball entry in (1), the player shifts the game state to the next specific control state by the game state-transferring means, and then the opening/closing ball-entering. A second specific game that provides the player with a higher value than the first specific game can be started by causing the game ball to enter the means. Further, when the player starts the game in the specific control state by entering the game ball into the variable ball entry means, the player expects the game ball to enter the second ball entry section, You will expect the start of the 2 specific game. Therefore, the gaming machine can further increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in feature E1 or feature E2 of the invention group,
The game state transition means executes a lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game, thereby increasing the number of game balls to the first ball entering section and the second ball entering section. A gaming machine characterized by setting the first specific game and the second specific game to be started when a ball is entered.

According to the feature E3 of the present invention group, the game state transition means executes a lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game, thereby forming the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section. Since the first specific game and the second specific game to be started when the game ball enters the ball are set, the player pays attention to the result of the lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game. It will be. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E1 to feature E3 of the present invention group,
The specific control starting means starts the first specific game capable of paying out a predetermined number of game balls, and starts the second specific game capable of paying out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. A game machine characterized by

According to feature E4 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means starts a first specific game capable of paying out a predetermined number of game balls, and a second specific game capable of paying out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. Since the specific game is started, the player expects the start of the second specific game when starting the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E5.
In the gaming machine described in feature E4 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The specific control starting means is
After the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again, one game in the specific control state (round game) is set, and the number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to a predetermined number. By doing so, the first specific game capable of paying out the predetermined number of game balls is started, and the predetermined number of games are played by setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times. The game machine is characterized by starting the second specific game in which more game balls than balls can be put out.

According to feature E5 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means starts the first specific game capable of putting out a predetermined number of game balls by setting the opening/closing count of the open/close ball entry means to a predetermined number of times, and opens/closes the game. By setting the number of times of opening and closing the ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times, a second specific game is started in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be put out, so that the player can perform specific control. When starting the game in the state, the start of the second specific game is expected. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E1 to feature E5 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entry means
A croon (croon 53E) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion are provided on the rolling surface and enter a game ball rolling on the rolling surface.

According to feature E6 of the present invention group, the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion are provided on the rolling surface of the croon. Pay attention to where the ball is going. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E1 to feature E6 of the present invention group,
The opening and closing ball entry means includes:
a first receiving portion (each plate-shaped body 513) that receives a game ball that has entered the opening and closing ball entry means;
A second receiving portion (each lower blade member 515) that receives a game ball that has entered the second ball entering portion,
By receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, the state is shifted from the open state to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball at the second receiving portion, the state is shifted from the closed state to the open state. Amusement machine.

According to feature E7 of the present invention group, the opening/closing ball entry means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, and receives the game ball at the second receiving portion. , the closed state is shifted to the open state, so that the open/closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

Feature E8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E1 to feature E7 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
Equipped with a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37),
The game machine is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part;
and the opening and closing ball entry means arranged on the first path,
The game state transition means is
a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
a second gaming state (high-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes internal lottery for a predetermined number of times, and then switches to the second game state. to the first game state.

According to feature E8 of the present invention group, the player, after finishing the game in the specific control state, until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (until switching from the second game state to the first game state b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering a game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering part via the second route, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering part through the first route. By doing so, an internal lottery can be performed. Therefore, when the opening/closing ball-entering means is arranged on the first path, the player must wait until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the opening/closing ball-entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state. If the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball will enter the open/close ball entering means via the first path. In this case, the open/close ball-entering means shifts from the open state to the closed state, so the player must shift the game state to the specific control state before the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. The game can be played in the hope that the player will

Feature E9.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E1 to feature E7 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
Equipped with a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37),
The game machine is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part;
said opening and closing ball-entering means arranged on a third path (weakening strike route) different from said first path and said second path;
The game state transition means is
a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
a second gaming state (high-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes internal lottery for a predetermined number of times, and then switches to the second game state. to the first game state.

According to feature E9 of the present invention group, after the player finishes playing the game in the specific control state, until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (until switching from the second game state to the first game state) b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering a game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering part via the second route, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering part through the first route. By doing so, an internal lottery can be performed. Further, when the opening/closing ball-entering means is arranged on the third path, the player must wait until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the opening/closing ball-entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state. Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball is not entered into the opening/closing ball entering means. In this case, since the open/close ball-entering means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

According to the characteristic group E of the present invention, it is possible to expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game, so that the following problems can be solved. .

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. The gaming machine shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, for example, when winning a jackpot lottery. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, after shifting the game state to the specific control state, the gaming machine follows the same flow to start the game in the specific control state regardless of whether or not the action of the player is intervened. There is a problem that the series of flow from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Identification advantageous to the player based on the starting ball entry means to be executed (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) and the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state to a control state,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and from the open state to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball into itself. Opening and closing ball entry means (non-electric accessory 51) that shifts to
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball to the starting ball entry means, variable ball entry means (clone 53A and first cloon) that allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter 55) and
The variable ball entry means is
a ball entry section (holes 533A to 533C, 553A, 553B) for entering the game ball entered by the variable ball entry means;
An opening/closing lottery means (rotating body 537, tray 538, and second crew 56) that executes a lottery related to the opening/closing ball entry means based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry portion,
The game state transition means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state, specific control start means (game state migration process),
The game in the specific control state is
A first specific game (4 round games);
A second specific game (16 round games) that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific control starting means starts either the first specific game or the second specific game when a game ball enters the ball entering section.

According to the feature F1 of the group of the present invention, the gaming machine allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. The variable ball entry means is provided with a ball entry section for starting a game in a specific control state when a game ball is entered. After transitioning to the specific control state, the game in the specific control state can be started by entering the game ball into the ball entry section. In addition, since the variable ball entry means is provided with opening/closing lottery means for executing a lottery related to the opening/closing ball entry means based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry portion, for example, the lottery executed by the opening/closing lottery means When the game is won and the opening/closing ball entry means is shifted from the closed state to the open state, the player shifts the game state to the next specific control state by the game state transition means, and then switches to the opening/closing ball entry means. A game in a specific control state can be started by entering a game ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

In addition, the game in the specific control state includes a first specific game and a second specific game that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game, and the specific control start means moves to the ball entering section. Since either the first specific game or the second specific game is started when the game ball is entered, the player enters the game in the specific control state by entering the game ball into the variable ball entry means. In the case of starting, the start of the second specific game is expected. Therefore, the gaming machine can further increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F2.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Identification advantageous to the player based on the starting ball entry means to be executed (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) and the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state to a control state,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and from the open state to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball into itself. Opening and closing ball entry means (non-electric accessory 51) that shifts to
The game ball flowing down the game area can be entered based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, and the opening and closing entry is made based on the entry of the game ball. A variable ball entry means (clone 53C) that shifts the means from a closed state to an open state,
The game state transition means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state, specific control start means (game state transition processing) for starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the open/close ball entry means and the variable ball entry means ),
The game in the specific control state is
A first specific game (4 round games);
A second specific game (16 round games) that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific control starting means starts either the first specific game or the second specific game when a game ball enters the variable ball entering means.

According to feature F2 of the present invention group, the gaming machine allows a game ball flowing down the game area to be entered based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. Since the variable ball entry means starts the game in the specific control state when the game ball is entered, the player can switch the game state to the specific control state by the game state transfer means. A game in a specific control state can be started by entering a game ball into the variable ball entry means. Further, when the open/close ball-entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state by entering the game ball into the variable ball-entering means, the player changes the game state to the next game state by the game state shifting means. After shifting to the specific control state, the game in the specific control state can be started by entering the game ball into the opening/closing ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, the game in the specific control state includes a first specific game and a second specific game that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game, and the specific control start means is a variable ball entry means. Since either the first specific game or the second specific game is started when the game ball enters the game ball, the player can enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means to play the game in a specific control state. is to be started, the start of the second specific game is expected. Therefore, the gaming machine can further increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F3.
In the gaming machine described in feature F1 or feature F2 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine, wherein the game in the specific control state that is started when a game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means is the second specific game.

According to the feature F3 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the open/close ball entering means is the second specified game, so the game ball enters the variable ball entering means. When the opening/closing ball-entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state based on the ball, the player shifts the game state to the next specific control state by the game state transitioning means, and then switches to the opening/closing ball-entering means. By entering a game ball, it is possible to start a second specific game that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game. Further, when the player starts the game in the specific control state by entering the game ball into the variable ball entry means, the player expects the start of the second specific game. Therefore, the gaming machine can further increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means executes a lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game, thereby starting the first specific game when the game ball is entered into the variable ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by setting a game and the second specific game.

According to the feature F4 of the present invention group, the game state transition means executes a lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game, and is started when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means. Since the first specific game and the second specific game are set, the player will pay attention to the result of the lottery to select the first specific game and the second specific game. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F4 of the present invention group,
The specific control starting means starts the first specific game capable of paying out a predetermined number of game balls, and starts the second specific game capable of paying out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. A game machine characterized by

According to feature F5 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means starts a first specific game capable of paying out a predetermined number of game balls, and a second specific game capable of paying out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. Since the specific game is started, the player expects the start of the second specific game when starting the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F6.
In the game machine described in feature F5 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The specific control starting means is
After the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again, one game in the specific control state (round game) is set, and the number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to a predetermined number. By doing so, the first specific game capable of paying out the predetermined number of game balls is started, and the predetermined number of games are played by setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times. The game machine is characterized by starting the second specific game in which more game balls than balls can be put out.

According to the feature F6 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means starts the first specific game capable of putting out a predetermined number of game balls by setting the opening/closing count of the open/close ball entry means to a predetermined number of times, and opens/closes the game. By setting the number of times of opening and closing the ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times, a second specific game is started in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be put out, so that the player can perform specific control. When starting the game in the state, the start of the second specific game is expected. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entry means is
a plurality of ball-entering portions (holes 533A to 533C, 553A, 553B) for entering the gaming ball entered by the variable ball-entering means;
A croon (croon 53A, croon 53C, and first croon 55) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means,
A gaming machine, wherein the plurality of ball entry portions are provided on the rolling surface and enter a game ball rolling on the rolling surface.

According to the feature F7 of the present invention group, since the plurality of ball entry parts are provided on the rolling surface of the croon, the player can pay attention to where the game ball enters the variable ball entry means. Become. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7 of the present invention group,
The opening and closing ball entry means includes:
a first receiving portion (each plate-shaped body 513) that receives a game ball that has entered the opening and closing ball entry means;
A second receiving portion (each lower blade member 515) that receives a game ball that has entered the second ball entering portion,
By receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, the state is shifted from the open state to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball at the second receiving portion, the state is shifted from the closed state to the open state. Amusement machine.

According to feature F8 of the present invention group, the opening/closing ball entry means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, and receives the game ball at the second receiving portion. , the closed state is shifted to the open state, so that the open/closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

Feature F9.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to E8 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
Equipped with a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37),
The game machine is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part;
and the opening and closing ball entry means arranged on the first path,
The game state transition means is
a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
a second gaming state (high-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes internal lottery a predetermined number of times, and then switches to the second game state. to the first game state.

According to the feature F9 of the present invention group, after the game in the specific control state is completed, the player can execute the internal lottery for a predetermined number of times (until the second game state is switched to the first game state). b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering a game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering part via the second route, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering part through the first route. By doing so, an internal lottery can be performed. Therefore, when the opening/closing ball-entering means is arranged on the first path, the player must wait until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the opening/closing ball-entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state. If the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball will enter the open/close ball entering means via the first path. In this case, the open/close ball-entering means shifts from the open state to the closed state, so the player must shift the game state to the specific control state before the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. The game can be played in the hope that the player will

Feature F10.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F8 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
Equipped with a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37),
The game machine is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part;
said opening and closing ball-entering means arranged on a third path (weakening strike route) different from said first path and said second path;
The game state transition means is
a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
a second gaming state (high-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes internal lottery for a predetermined number of times, and then switches to the second game state. to the first game state.

According to the feature F10 of the present invention group, the player, after finishing the game in the specific control state, until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (until switching from the second game state to the first game state b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering a game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering part via the second route, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering part through the first route. By doing so, an internal lottery can be performed. Further, when the opening/closing ball-entering means is arranged on the third path, the player must wait until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the opening/closing ball-entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state. Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball is not entered into the opening/closing ball entering means. In this case, since the open/close ball-entering means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

According to the characteristic group F of the present invention, it is possible to expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game, so that the following problems can be solved. .

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. The gaming machine shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, for example, when winning a jackpot lottery. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, after shifting the game state to the specific control state, the gaming machine follows the same flow to start the game in the specific control state regardless of whether or not the action of the player is intervened. There is a problem that the series of flow from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Identification advantageous to the player based on the starting ball entry means to be executed (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) and the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state to a control state,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball to the starting ball entry means, a variable ball entry means (clone 53E) that allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter,
The variable ball entry means is
a specific ball entry section (round game execution gate) that allows the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to be entered, and that controls the game in the specific control state based on the entry of the game ball;
It is characterized by comprising a non-specific ball entry section (replay gate) that allows a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to enter, and does not control the game in the specific control state based on the entry of the game ball. game machine.

According to feature G1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine can enter a game ball flowing down the game area based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. The variable ball entry means has a specific ball entry section for controlling a game in a specific control state when a game ball is entered. After shifting to the specific control state, the game in the specific control state can be controlled by entering the game ball into the specific ball entry section. Further, since the non-specific ball entry section does not control the game in the specific control state based on the entry of the game ball, the player can cause the variable ball entry means to enter the game ball again. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G2.
In the gaming machine described in feature G1 of the invention group,
The gaming machine characterized in that the non-specific ball entry section executes the payout of the game ball based on the entry of the game ball.

According to feature G2 of the present invention group, since the non-specific ball entry section executes the payout of the game ball based on the entry of the game ball, the player changes the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means After the transition, the number of game balls can be increased without controlling the game in the specific control state by entering the game balls into the non-specific ball entry section. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G3.
In the gaming machine described in feature G1 or feature G2 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and the open state changes to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball into itself. Equipped with an opening and closing ball entry means (non-electric accessory 51) that shifts to
The game state transition means is
Specific control start means (game state transition processing) for starting a game in the specific control state when a game ball enters the specific ball entering section after shifting the game state to the specific control state,
The variable ball entry means
the non-specific ball-entering unit that allows the game ball that has entered the variable ball-entering means to be entered, and does not shift the opening/closing ball-entering means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball;
It is characterized by comprising the specific ball-entering unit that allows a game ball that has entered the variable ball-entering means to enter, and shifts the opening/closing ball-entering means from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of the game ball. Amusement machine.

According to the feature G3 of the present invention group, the specific ball-entering unit shifts the opening/closing ball-entering means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, so that the player can play the game using the game state transition means. After shifting the state to the next specific control state, the game in the specific control state can be started by entering the game ball into the opening/closing ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature G4.
In the gaming machine described in feature G1 or feature G2 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and from the open state to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball into itself. Equipped with an opening and closing ball entry means (non-electric accessory 51) that shifts to
The game state transition means is
After shifting the game state to the specific control state, specific control start means (game state transition processing) for starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball enters the specific ball entering section,
The variable ball entry means is
a specific ball-entering unit that allows a game ball that has entered the variable ball-entering means to be entered, and that does not cause the opening/closing ball-entering means to shift from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of the game ball;
The game ball entering the variable ball entering means can be entered, and the opening/closing ball entering means can shift from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. Characteristic game machine.

According to the feature G4 of the present invention group, the non-specific ball-entering section shifts the opening/closing ball-entering means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, so that the player can then open/close the ball-entering means. A game in a specific control state can be started without entering a game ball into a specific ball-entering portion by entering the game ball into the specific ball-entering portion. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature G5.
In the gaming machine described in feature G3 or feature G4 of the present invention group,
The game in the specific control state is
A first specific game (4 round games);
A second specific game (16 round games) that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific control starting means starts either the first specific game or the second specific game when a game ball enters the specific ball entering section.

According to feature G5 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state includes a first specific game and a second specific game that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game, and the specific control Since the starting means starts either the first specific game or the second specific game when the game ball enters the specific ball entering part, the player causes the game ball to enter the specific ball entering part. Thus, when starting a game in a specific control state, the start of the second specific game is expected. Therefore, the gaming machine can further increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G6.
In the gaming machine described in feature G5 of the invention group,
A game machine, wherein the game in the specific control state started when a game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means is the second specific game.

According to feature G6 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means is the second specific game, so that the opening/closing ball entry means is changed from the closed state to the open state. , the player starts a second specific game that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game by entering a game ball into the opening/closing ball entry means. be able to. Therefore, the gaming machine can further increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G7.
In the gaming machine described in feature G5 or feature G6 of the present invention group,
The game state transition means executes a lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game, thereby starting the first specific game when the game ball enters the specific ball entering section. A gaming machine characterized by setting a game and the second specific game.

According to the feature G7 of the present invention group, the game state transition means executes a lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game, and is started when the game ball enters the specific ball entering section. Since the first specific game and the second specific game are set, the player will pay attention to the result of the lottery to select the first specific game and the second specific game. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G7 of the invention group,
The specific control starting means starts the first specific game capable of paying out a predetermined number of game balls, and starts the second specific game capable of paying out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. A game machine characterized by

According to feature G8 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means starts a first specific game capable of paying out a predetermined number of game balls, and a second specific game capable of paying out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. Since the specific game is started, the player expects the start of the second specific game when starting the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G9.
In the gaming machine described in feature G8 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The specific control starting means is
After the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again, one game in the specific control state (round game) is set, and the number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to a predetermined number. By doing so, the first specific game capable of paying out the predetermined number of game balls is started, and the predetermined number of games are played by setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times. The game machine is characterized by starting the second specific game in which more game balls than balls can be put out.

According to the feature G9 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means starts the first specific game capable of putting out a predetermined number of game balls by setting the number of times of opening and closing the ball entry means to a predetermined number of times, and opens and closes the game. By setting the number of times of opening and closing the ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times, a second specific game is started in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be put out, so that the player can perform specific control. When starting the game in the state, the start of the second specific game is expected. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G10.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features G3 to G9 of the present invention group,
The opening and closing ball entry means includes:
a first receiving portion (each plate-like body 513) for receiving a game ball entered by the opening/closing ball entry means;
A second receiving portion (each lower blade member 515) that receives a game ball that has entered the second ball entering portion,
By receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, the state is shifted from the open state to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball at the second receiving portion, the state is shifted from the closed state to the open state. Amusement machine.

According to feature G10 of the present invention group, the opening/closing ball entry means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, and receives the game ball at the second receiving portion. , the closed state is shifted to the open state, so that the open/closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

Feature G11.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G10 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
Equipped with a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37),
The game machine is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part;
and the opening and closing ball entry means arranged on the first path,
The game state transition means is
a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
a second gaming state (high-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes internal lottery for a predetermined number of times, and then switches to the second game state. to the first game state.

According to feature G11 of the present invention group, the player, after finishing the game in the specific control state, until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (until switching from the second game state to the first game state) b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering a game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering part via the second route, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering part through the first route. By doing so, an internal lottery can be performed. Therefore, when the opening/closing ball-entering means is arranged on the first path, the player must wait until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the opening/closing ball-entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state. If the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball will enter the open/close ball entering means via the first path. In this case, the open/close ball-entering means shifts from the open state to the closed state, so the player must shift the game state to the specific control state before the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. The game can be played in the hope that the player will

Feature G12.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G10 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
Equipped with a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37),
The game machine is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part;
said opening and closing ball-entering means arranged on a third path (weakening strike route) different from said first path and said second path;
The game state transition means is
a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
a second gaming state (high-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes internal lottery a predetermined number of times, and then switches to the second game state. to the first game state.

According to feature G12 of the present invention group, the player, after finishing the game in the specific control state, until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (until switching from the second game state to the first game state b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering a game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering part via the second route, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering part through the first route. By doing so, an internal lottery can be performed. Further, when the opening/closing ball-entering means is arranged on the third path, the player must wait until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the opening/closing ball-entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state. Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball is not entered into the opening/closing ball entering means. In this case, since the open/close ball-entering means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Feature G13.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G12 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entry means is
A croon (croon 53E) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball-entering portion and the non-specific ball-entering portion are provided on the rolling surface and enter a game ball rolling on the rolling surface.

According to feature G13 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entry portion and the non-specific ball entry portion are provided on the rolling surface of the croon, the player can easily determine the destination of the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means. will pay attention to. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group G of the present invention, it is possible to expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game, so that the following problems can be solved. .

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. The gaming machine shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, for example, when winning a jackpot lottery. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, after shifting the game state to the specific control state, the gaming machine follows the same flow to start the game in the specific control state regardless of whether or not the action of the player is intervened. There is a problem that the series of flow from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Identification advantageous to the player based on the starting ball entry means to be executed (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) and the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state to a control state,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball to the starting ball entry means, a variable ball entry means (clone 53E) that allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter,
The variable ball entry means is
a specific ball entry section (round game execution gate) that allows the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to be entered, and that controls the game in the specific control state based on the entry of the game ball;
The game ball entered by the variable ball entry means can be entered, and the game in the specific control state is played based on the entry of the game ball so as to be different from the control of the game in the specific control state by the specific ball entry unit. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a non-specific ball entry section (replay gate) that controls the.

According to feature H1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine allows a game ball flowing down the game area to be entered based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. The variable ball entry means is provided with a specific ball entry section for executing a game in a specific control state when a game ball is entered. After shifting to the specific control state, the game in the specific control state can be controlled by entering the game ball into the specific ball entry section. Further, the non-specific ball-entering section controls the game in the specific control state based on the entry of the game ball, unlike the control of the game in the specific control state by the specific ball-entering section. After the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the transition means, the game ball is entered into the non-specific ball entering section, whereby specific control is performed in a manner different from the control of the game in the specific control state by the specific ball entering section. State play can be controlled. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature H2.
In the gaming machine described in feature H1 of the invention group,
The game state transition means is
Specific control start means (game state transition processing) for starting a game in the specific control state when a game ball enters the specific ball entering section after shifting the game state to the specific control state,
The game in the specific control state is
A first specific game (4 round games);
A second specific game (16 round games) that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific control starting means starts either the first specific game or the second specific game when a game ball enters the specific ball entering section.

According to feature H2 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state includes a first specific game and a second specific game that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game, and the specific control Since the starting means starts either the first specific game or the second specific game when the game ball enters the specific ball entering section, the player causes the game ball to enter the variable ball entering means. Thus, when starting a game in a specific control state, the start of the second specific game is expected. Therefore, the gaming machine can further increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature H3.
In the game machine described in feature H2 of the invention group,
The game state transition means executes a lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game, thereby starting the first specific game when the game ball enters the specific ball entering section. By setting the game and the second specific game and executing a re-lottery to select the first specific game and the second specific game when the game ball enters the non-specific ball entry section, A gaming machine, wherein the first specific game and the second specific game to be started when a game ball enters the specific ball entering section are reset.

According to the feature H3 of the present invention group, the game state transition means executes a lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game, thereby starting when the game ball enters the specific ball entering section. Since the first specific game and the second specific game are set, the player will pay attention to the result of the lottery to select the first specific game and the second specific game. Further, the game state transition means executes a re-lottery for selecting the first specific game and the second specific game when the game ball enters the non-specific ball entering part, thereby allowing the game to enter the specific ball entering part. Since the first specific game and the second specific game to be started at the time of ball entry are reset, the player can enter the game ball into the non-specific ball entry section, thereby performing the first specific game and the second specific game. It is possible to change the result of the lottery for selecting the 2 specific games. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature H4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature H1 to feature H3 of the invention group,
The specific control starting means starts the first specific game capable of paying out a predetermined number of game balls, and starts the second specific game capable of paying out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. A game machine characterized by

According to feature H4 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means starts a first specific game capable of paying out a predetermined number of game balls, and a second specific game capable of paying out more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls. Since the specific game is started, the player expects the start of the second specific game when starting the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature H5.
In the gaming machine described in feature H4 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter, and an open/close entering ball pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters. Means (variable winning device 38) is provided,
The specific control starting means is
After the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again, one game in the specific control state (round game) is set, and the number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing ball-entering means is set to a predetermined number. By doing so, the first specific game capable of paying out the predetermined number of game balls is started, and the predetermined number of games are played by setting the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times. The game machine is characterized by starting the second specific game in which more game balls than balls can be put out.

According to the feature H5 of the present invention group, the specific control starting means starts the first specific game capable of putting out a predetermined number of game balls by setting the number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing ball entry means to a predetermined number of times. By setting the number of times of opening and closing the ball entry means to a number greater than the predetermined number of times, a second specific game is started in which more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be put out, so that the player can perform specific control. When starting the game in the state, the start of the second specific game is expected. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature H6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature H1 to feature H5 of the invention group,
The gaming machine characterized in that the non-specific ball entry section executes the payout of the game ball based on the entry of the game ball.

According to the feature H6 of the present invention group, the non-specific ball entry section executes the payout of the game ball based on the entry of the game ball. After the shift, the number of game balls can be increased without starting the game in the specific control state by entering the game balls into the non-specific ball entry section. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature H7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and from the open state to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball into itself. Equipped with an opening and closing ball entry means (non-electric accessory 51) that shifts to
The variable ball entry means is
the non-specific ball-entering unit that allows the game ball that has entered the variable ball-entering means to be entered, and does not shift the opening/closing ball-entering means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball;
It is characterized by comprising the specific ball-entering unit that allows the game ball that has entered the variable ball-entering means to be entered, and shifts the opening/closing ball-entering means from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of the game ball. Amusement machine.

According to the feature H7 of the present invention group, the specific ball entry unit shifts the open/close ball entry means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, so that the player can play the game with the game state transition means. After shifting the state to the next specific control state, the game in the specific control state can be started by entering the game ball into the opening/closing ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature H8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6 of the invention group,
It has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is entered and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not entered, and from the open state to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball into itself. Equipped with an opening and closing ball entry means (non-electric accessory 51) that shifts to
The variable ball entry means is
a specific ball-entering unit that allows a game ball that has entered the variable ball-entering means to be entered, and that does not cause the opening/closing ball-entering means to shift from a closed state to an open state based on the entry of the game ball;
The game ball entering the variable ball entering means can be entered, and the opening/closing ball entering means can shift from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball. Characteristic game machine.

According to the feature H8 of the present invention group, the non-specific ball-entering section shifts the opening/closing ball-entering means from the closed state to the open state based on the entry of the game ball, so that the player can then open/close the ball-entering means. A game in a specific control state can be started without entering a game ball into a specific ball-entering portion by entering the game ball into the specific ball-entering portion. Therefore, the gaming machine can expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature H9.
In the gaming machine described in feature H7 or feature H8 of the present invention group,
A game machine, wherein the game in the specific control state started when a game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means is the second specific game.

According to feature H9 of the present invention group, the game in the specific control state that starts when the game ball enters the opening/closing ball entry means is the second specific game, so the opening/closing ball entry means is changed from the closed state to the open state. , the player starts a second specific game that gives the player a higher value than the first specific game by entering a game ball into the opening/closing ball entry means. be able to. Therefore, the gaming machine can further increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature H10.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature H7 to feature H9 of the present invention group,
The opening and closing ball entry means includes:
a first receiving portion (each plate-shaped body 513) that receives a game ball that has entered the opening and closing ball entry means;
A second receiving portion (each lower blade member 515) that receives a game ball that has entered the second ball entering portion,
By receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, the state is shifted from the open state to the closed state, and by receiving the game ball at the second receiving portion, the state is shifted from the closed state to the open state. Amusement machine.

According to the feature H10 of the present invention group, the opening/closing ball entry means shifts from the open state to the closed state by receiving the game ball at the first receiving portion, and receives the game ball at the second receiving portion. , the closed state is shifted to the open state, so that the open/closed state can be shifted using only the weight of the game ball without requiring other power such as electric power.

Feature H11.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature H7 to feature H10 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
Equipped with a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37),
The game machine is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part;
and the opening and closing ball entry means arranged on the first path,
The game state transition means is
a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
a second gaming state (high-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes internal lottery for a predetermined number of times, and then switches to the second game state. to the first game state.

According to the feature H11 of the present invention group, after the game in the specific control state is finished, the player can wait until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (until the game state is switched from the second game state to the first game state). b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering a game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering part via the second route, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering part through the first route. By doing so, an internal lottery can be performed. Therefore, when the opening/closing ball-entering means is arranged on the first path, the player must wait until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the opening/closing ball-entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state. If the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball will enter the open/close ball entering means via the first path. In this case, the open/close ball-entering means shifts from the open state to the closed state, so the player must shift the game state to the specific control state before the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. The game can be played in the hope that the player will

Feature H12.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature H7 to feature H10 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
Equipped with a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 37),
The game machine is
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part;
said opening and closing ball-entering means arranged on a third path (weakening strike route) different from said first path and said second path;
The game state transition means is
a first gaming state (low-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is lower than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
a second gaming state (high-frequency support mode) in which the probability of entering the second starting ball-entering section is higher than that of the first starting ball-entering section;
A game state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between the first game state and the second game state,
The game state switching means switches from the first game state to the second game state after finishing the game in the specific control state, executes internal lottery a predetermined number of times, and then switches to the second game state. to the first game state.

According to the feature H12 of the present invention group, after the game in the specific control state is completed, the player is allowed to execute the internal lottery for a predetermined number of times (until the second game state is switched to the first game state). b) An internal lottery can be executed by entering a game ball into the second starting ball entering section via the second path. After that, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering part via the second route, the player enters the game ball into the first starting ball entering part through the first route. By doing so, an internal lottery can be performed. Further, when the opening/closing ball-entering means is arranged on the third path, the player must wait until the internal lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the opening/closing ball-entering means is shifted from the closed state to the open state. Even if the game state is not shifted to the specific control state, the game ball is not entered into the opening/closing ball entering means. In this case, since the open/close ball-entering means does not shift from the open state to the closed state, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Feature H13.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H12 of the invention group,
The variable ball entry means is
A croon (croon 53E) having a rolling surface (rolling surface 531) for rolling the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific ball-entering portion and the non-specific ball-entering portion are provided on the rolling surface and enter a game ball rolling on the rolling surface.

According to feature H13 of the present invention group, since the specific ball entry portion and the non-specific ball entry portion are provided on the rolling surface of the croon, the player can easily determine the destination of the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means. will pay attention to. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group H of the present invention, it is possible to expand the player's options and improve the player's attention to the game, so that the following problems can be solved. .

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. The gaming machine shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, for example, when winning a jackpot lottery. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, after shifting the game state to the specific control state, the gaming machine follows the same flow to start the game in the specific control state regardless of whether or not the action of the player is intervened. There is a problem that the series of flow from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising lottery ball entry means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed,
Variable ball entry means (variable ball entry mechanism 52H) that allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the lottery ball entry means with
The variable ball entry means
An open/close valve (open/close valve 526) that has an open state in which the game ball entered by the variable ball entry means passes and a closed state in which it does not pass, and switches between the open state and the closed state;
A first route (execution gate route) that guides the game ball that has passed through the on-off valve to the first flow path (downstream guide passage 522b), and a second flow path (downstream A route switching valve (plate 523a) that has a second route (clone route) that guides to the side guide passage 522c) and switches between the first route and the second route;
A first ball entry possible state (execution A state in which a ball can be entered into a gate) and a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area so as to pass through the on-off valve when being switched to the second route by the route switching valve can be entered. a ball-enterable state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between two ball-enterable states (croon-enterable states).

According to feature I1 of the present invention group, the ball-enterable state switching means switches between the first ball-enterable state and the second ball-enterable state, and the first ball-enterable state is switched by the route switching valve. A game ball that flows down the game area so as to pass through the on-off valve when being switched to the first route is set to be able to enter, and the second ball possible state is set to the second route by the route switching valve. A game ball that flows down the game area so as to pass through the on-off valve when being switched to the route is set to be able to enter. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the timing of switching the on-off valve to the open state, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature I2.
In the gaming machine described in feature I1 of the invention group,
The ball-enterable state switching means selects the first ball-enterable state and the second ball-enterable state based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the lottery ball-entering means. A gaming machine characterized by switching states.

According to feature I2 of the present invention group, the ball-enterable state switching means selects the first ball-enterable state and the Since the second ball-enterable state is switched, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the lottery ball-entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature I3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature I1 or Feature I2 of the present invention group,
The first route gives a predetermined value to the player by guiding the game ball to the first flow path, and the second route guides the game ball to the second flow path. A game machine characterized by giving a higher value to a player than the first flow path.

According to feature I3 of the group of inventions, the second route gives the player a higher value than the first route by guiding the game ball to the second route, so that the player can: It is expected that the ball entry possible state switching means will switch to the second ball entry possible state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group I of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. The gaming machine shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, for example, when winning a jackpot lottery. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, after shifting the game state to the specific control state, the gaming machine follows the same flow to start the game in the specific control state regardless of whether or not the action of the player is intervened. There is a problem that the series of flow from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising lottery ball entry means (upper operating port 36 and lower operating port 37) to be executed,
Variable ball entry means (variable ball entry mechanism 52H) that allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter based on the result of the internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the lottery ball entry means with
The variable ball entry means is
A first route (execution gate route) that guides the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to the first flow path (downstream side guide passage 522b), and a second flow that is different from the first flow path. A route switching valve (plate 523a) for switching between the first route and the second route,
The first route gives value to the player over a predetermined period of time by guiding game balls to the first flow path, and the second route guides the game ball to the second flow path. This game machine is characterized by giving a value to a player by guiding a ball over a longer period of time than the first route.

According to feature J1 of the present invention group, the first route gives value to the player over a predetermined period of time by guiding the game ball to the first flow path, and the second route is the second route. By guiding the game ball to the flow path No. 2, the value is given to the player taking a longer time than the first route, so that the player can switch to the first route by the route switching valve. In this case, the user can proceed to the next game with a sense of humor, and when switched to the second route, the player can thoroughly enjoy the game. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature J2.
In the gaming machine described in feature J1 of the invention group,
The variable ball entry means
A rolling surface (rolling surface 531) on which the game ball entered by the variable ball entry means rolls;
Provided on the rolling surface and having a ball entry portion (each hole 533A to 533C) for entering a game ball rolling on the rolling surface (Cloon 53),
The gaming machine, wherein the second route guides the game ball to the rolling surface of the croon by guiding the game ball to the second flow path.

According to the feature J2 of the group of the present invention, the second route guides the game ball to the rolling surface of the croon by guiding the game ball to the second flow path, so that the player can enjoy the first flow path. Value can be imparted over a longer period of time, and the player pays attention to the destination of the game ball entering the variable ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature J3.
In the gaming machine described in feature J1 or feature J2 of the present invention group,
The variable ball entry means is
An open/close valve (open/close valve 526) that has an open state in which the game ball entered by the variable ball entry means passes and a closed state in which it does not pass, and switches between the open state and the closed state;
the route switching valve that guides the game ball that has passed through the on-off valve to the first flow path or the second flow path;
A first ball entry possible state (execution A state in which a ball can be entered into a gate) and a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area so as to pass through the on-off valve when being switched to the second route by the route switching valve can be entered. a ball-enterable state switching means (main controller 60) for switching between two ball-enterable states (croon-enterable states).

According to feature J3 of the present invention group, the ball-enterable state switching means switches between the first ball-enterable state and the second ball-enterable state, and the first ball-enterable state is switched by the route switching valve. A game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the game area so as to pass through the on-off valve when switched to the first route, and opened and closed when switched to the second route by the route switching valve. A game ball that flows down the game area so as to pass through the valve is set to be able to enter. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the timing of switching the on-off valve to the open state, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

According to the characteristic J group of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. The gaming machine shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, for example, when winning a jackpot lottery. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, after shifting the game state to the specific control state, the gaming machine follows the same flow to start the game in the specific control state regardless of whether or not the action of the player is intervened. There is a problem that the series of flow from the transition of the game state to the start of the game in the specific control state becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is lowered.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for game machines such as pachinko game machines.

10... Pachinko machine 35... General winning opening 36... Upper operating opening 37... Lower operating opening 38... Variable winning device 38a... Large winning opening 38b... Open/close door 38c... Variable winning driving section 39... Out Mouth 47... Symbol display device 60... Main control device 62... MPU 90... Sound emission control device 92... MPU 100... Display control device 102... MPU.

Claims (1)

A launching means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and a starting ball entry for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. means, and game state transition means for transitioning the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. machine and
A variable ball entry means that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter based on the result of an internal lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means,
The variable ball entry means is
a specific ball entry unit that allows the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to be entered, and that controls the game in the specific control state based on the entry of the game ball;
A gaming machine, comprising: a non-specific ball-entering section that allows a game ball that has entered the variable ball-entering means to be entered, and that does not control the game in the specific control state based on the entry of the game ball.

Images